L A T IN
C O M P O S IT IO N
P RO SE
B A S E D ON C AES A R
C HA R L E S
C LA SS I C A L
N EPOS
,
,
CRO C K E R P
I
A N D H GH
A N D C I C E RO
O D GE
S C H OO L S A LE M ,
,
B A
.
,
MA SS
.
.
AN D
H I RA M
ST I N T U TT L E J R M
P O LY T E C H N I C I N S TIT U T E B R OO K LY N N Y
AU
,
,
N E W YO R K
A M
.
,
o
z
ERICA N
C I NC I NN AT I
B
OOK
.
,
.
A
.
C H ICAG O
C
OM
PA
NY
.
GI FT OF
1 8 98 ,
C OPY R IGH T ,
AM E R IC AN
B O O K CO M P AN Y
LA T I N P RO S E
W
c
""
c
BY
.
P
.
CO M P
4
.
,
P R E FA C E
pr ep a ra ti o n o f th is w o rk fo r th e u s e o f s c h oo l s a n
a tt e m pt h a s b ee n m a de t o c o m b i n e th e a dva nt a ge s o f th e o ld e r
In t he fo r m er t o o
s y s te m a t i c w i th th e n ew e r di sc u r s ive m e th o d
m u c h a t t e n t i o n wa s p a id t o s y n t a x t o o l i tt l e t o t h e a u th o r r e a d 5
wh il e i n th e l a t te r th e p u p il ha s n o t b ee n giv e n a n o pp o rt u ni t y to
i
ffi
c i en t ly c l ea r i d ea o f L a i n u s a g e t o h e l p hi m i n hi s s u b
a
n
s
u
a
g
t
In o u r a tt e mpt t o pro fit b y th e s u c c es s fu l fea t u r e s
s eq u en t w o rk
o f b o th m e th o d s e a c h exe r c i s e ha s b ee n a rra ng ed w i th th e fo l l o w
t he
IN
,
.
,
.
,
i ng
ai
ms
th e p u p il a c o mpr eh e ns iv e vie w o f the va ri o u s w a y s
i n wh i c h s o m e p a rt i c u l a r g r a mm a t i c a l r ela t i o n m a y b e expr es s e d
2
T o i ll u s t ra t e th e s e b y a n ex erc i s e b a s e d u p o n a l i mi t ed p o r
t i o n o f t h e t ex t re a d wi th e s p eci a l c a r e t o i ntr o du c e o nly s u c h
wo rd s a n d idi o ms a s a r e t o b e fo u nd i n t h e t ex t
a c h e x erc i s e s er v e a l s o a s a r e vie w b o t h o f t o p i c s
m
k
e
e
T
o
a
3
p r evi o u s ly s tu died a nd o f c o n s tr uc t io ns th a t h av e i n c ide nta lly
o c cu rr ed
e
n
e
T
v
s
m
n
es
a
i
i
t
r
e
t
k
i
t
h
e
exer
i
e
t
ed
o
p
o
b
c
s
co
n
n
a
c
s
n
4
g
y
g
y
SIS o f th e a u th o r s w o rk a v o idi n g i n th i s h o we v e r wh a t m i h t i n
g
a ny p o s s i bl e w a y b e u s ed a s a t ra n s l a t i o n
v e s u c h wo rk a s w i l l m ee t t h e de m a n d s o f th e b e s t
T
o
i
g
5
priv a t e a n d pu b l i c s c h ool s
I n p u rs u a n c e o f thi s p l a n th e I n tr o d u c t io n h a s b een di vided
i n t o L e s s o ns e ach o f whi c h tre a t s o f s o m e s p e c i fic gra mm a t i c a l
t opi c or g r o u p o f r el ated idea s a s c o m mo nl y exp re s s ed i n cl a s s i ca l
L ati n
I
.
T o giv e
.
.
,
.
r
.
.
’
,
,
.
.
.
,
,
.
8 40
M1 2 B
,
P
4
RE FA C E
i fied s ta te ment expre ss ed i n l a ng u a g e e a s il y u nde r
s t ood a n d ill u s tr a ted b y o ne s i m p le ex a m p le g ive s a c le a r co n c ep
tio n o f th e c o n s t r uc t i on b e fo r e th e p u p il i s r e fe rred t o th e m o r e
co mp l ex s t a t e me n t o f th e gra mm ar
For d i ffe r e n t fo r m s o f
expre s si o n a nd fu rth er ill u s tra tive ex a mp le s th ere ha s been a dded
t o e a c h p a ra gra ph t h e p a rt i c u l a r re fere nc e t o v a r i o u s g ra mm a r s
wh i l e th e m ore g e ne r a l r e fere nc e s h ave b ee n p l a c ed a t t h e h e a d
o f e a c h le s s o n
N o a t te mp t ha s b ee n ma de t o c ove r a ll th e c o n
s t r u c t i o ns i n L a ti n b u t onl y s u c h a s a r e c o mm o nly n eeded i n
s eco nd a ry s c h ool wo rk
T h e L e s s o n m a y b e tre ated a s a s p e c i a l s t u d y wh ile th a t p o r
tio n o f th e text o n wh i c h th e E xe r c i s e i s ba s ed i s bei ng r e a d
a nd e m ph a s i s s h o u ld b e l a id i n c l a s s w o rk o n th e t o p i c u nder
c o ns idera t io n
For t h o s e w ho do n o t c a re to u s e th e L e s s o n for
the I nt ro duction ha s b ee n p a ra g r aph ed fo r oc ca
s p e c i a l s tu d y
s i o u a l r e fe r e n c e
Al th o u g h th e c o nne cted n a r ra ti v e ma y a pp e a r fo r mid a ble y et
exp e rie nc e wi th s e vera l cl a s s e s ha s s h ow n th a t p u p il s c a n rea di ly
h a ndle t h e s e exerc i s e s Th e y h ave b ee n g ra ded t o th e a b i lity a s
de velop ed a nd a r e i nte nded t o b ri n g o u t th e c h a ra c te ri s t i c s o f
th e a u th o r T he y a r e o f s u ch le ngt h th a t t h e te a c h e r c a n gi ve
a lo ng or a s h o r t exerc i s e a cc o r di ng t o th e a bili t y o f hi s c l a s s
T h e C i c ero E xerci s e s a r e th e m o s t c o m p lex a n d g e ne r a l in c h a r
a c te r
a n d g i v e a th o r o u h d r ill i n r ev ie w o f th e c o n s t r u c t io n s
g
T h e C a e s a r a n d N e p o s E x er
r e q u i r ed o f p r e p a ra t o r y c l a s s e s
c i s e s m a y b e u s ed a s te s t s e a c h fo r t h e o th er th e t e a ch er g i vi ng
th e le ss c o m mo n wo r d s fo r v o ca bu l a ry ; while ei ther w o ul d g i ve
exc elle nt a nd s y s te mati c s i ght wo r k for a c l a s s s tu d yi ng th e C i c e ro
s ec ti on
We ta k e p le a s u re i n a c k no wled gi n g ou r o bli ga t i o n s to M r
E u g e n e D R u s s ell P r i nc i p a l o f th e Ly n n ( M a s s ) L a t i n Sc h o o l
fo r c a r e fu l ex a mi na t ion o f p roo f a nd va lu a b le c r i t i c i s ms a nd
s u gg e s tion s
T hi s
l
c as s
,
,
.
,
,
'
.
,
.
,
.
,
.
,
.
,
.
.
,
,
.
,
,
.
.
.
,
.
,
CONTE NTS
LE S SO N
S i mpl Arr g m nt f S t
S i m p l A g r m t R l ti
P ri p hr ti C j g ti
T
f t h I fi i ti
U
A b l t i Ab l t
d A w r
Q ti
O bj t C
A
ti
O bj t C
G i ti
— D ti
O bj t C
O bj t C
A bl ti
P i
P
G i ti D ti Adj t i
i
D ri p t i
By P h
D ri p t i
By Cl
M
d Ag
y
M
r d A mp i m t
C m p ri
R l ti
f Pl
R l ti
O f Ti m
By P hr
R l ti
f Ti m
D t
R l ti
By C l
f Ti m
f T
d S q
U
e
an
e
ee
as
e
c
on u
a
n
ve
o ns a n
u es
e a
.
o ns
7
8
v es
en s es
.
9
IO
12
so u e
ve
a
en en ce
o
e
en s
n
e
s es o
e
ns
I3
e s
ec
a s es
c cu s a
ec
a s es
en
ec
a s es
a
ec
a s es
I4
ve
16
ve
I
ve
a
19
ve
20
a s s v es
o s s es s o n :
en
a
ve,
es c
on
ras e
es c
on
a us e
ea n s a n
en c
anne
c co
an
v e,
ec
v e,
Pr
o no u n ,
2
a
e a
o ns O
e a
o ns
e
e a
ons O
e
e a
ons o
e
s e an
2
0
3
31
as e
2
3
a es
34
a us e
35
e n s es
u ence o
Ca us e
P rp
P rp
R lt
d i ti
C
C
d i ti
u
os e
u
os e
By Phr
By C l
37
8
3
ase
40
a us e
41
es u
S i mp l S t t m t
— C
tr ry t F t
i
d Pr i
D l r ti S t
d ir t D i
C
l S
r
d i ti
t
d ir t D i
dir t D i
d C mm
Q ti
f rm l I d i r t D i
r
d Attr t i
on
ons
on
on s
C o n c es s
I
I
I
I
n
n
n
n o
7
28
a ce
e
5
26
s on
o
22
23
en
an
7
e
on
on an
a
s co u r s e
ec
s co u s e
ec
s c o u rs e —
n
o
2
4
en
44
ac
e n en ces
43
46
en en ces
48
ov s o
ec
a
a e
ec
ec a a
on
ues
ve
on a
ons a n
s co u s e a n
o
ac
ands
on
49
5
0
C ONT E NT S
6
L E S SO N
XXX I V
XXX V
XXX V I
.
.
.
C o mm a n d s
Wi h s
P t n t i al
E
and
x
ho
rt t i
a
e
s
a nd
o e
D
e
libe
r ti
a
E X E RC I SES B A SE D O N CA ES AR
B k II
B k III
B k IV
B kI
oo
oo
oo
oo
EXE R C I SES B A SE D O N N E Po s
M i l ti d
T h mi t l
Ari ti d
d P
es
a
e
s o c es
s
es a n
a us a m as
Ci mo n
Ly s a n d r
A l i bi d
Thra s y b l us
e
c
es
a
u
Cono n
Di
Ep
on
.
a mi non d as
P el o p i d a s
A g es i l a u s
7
o ns
“
en es
c
Ph i
Ti m l n
H mil r
H ib l
C t
Atti
oc on
o eo
ca
a
a nn
a
a o
cu s
E X E R C I S ES BA SE D O N C I C E R O
I C t i li
II C ti l i
III C ti l i
IV C t i li
ne
a
ne
a
a
ne
a
ne
A r c hi a s
M a n i l i a n La w
S P E C IM EN EXAMI NATI O N PA P E R S
ve
C O M P O S IT IO N
P ROS E
LA T I N
I N TR OD U C TI ON
LESSO N I
[H
.
ark n ss C mp l t L at i n Gra mm ar
Gra m mar
in l s d i
p ar n t h s s
B
B nn tt ]
G ild r sl
G
H
’
e
e
n
e ev e .
e
.
e e
e
e
M 47 1
6
0
(5
.
.
A
.
M oo
=
n
ey
A
.
.
S en t ence
of
=
ark n ss S ta n d ar d L ati n
d Gr n
Al l n
gh
e
an
e
ee
34 3 34 5
—
6
6
6
6
H
3
[
5
.
.
G 6 7 1—6 8 3
—
.
M
.
H
to
ou
.
.
Ar r a ng emen t
S i mpl e
R efe r e n ce s
1 89 8
,
c o e
a re
.
e e
o
’
.
.
B
.
.
6 7 I —68 0
z
8
4
3
I n a Latin senten ce the most important word usually
stands first A S a rule this i s the su b j ect while the verb
b eing unemphatic is p lac ed near the en d o f the sentence
The position o f the verb s u m is governed b y eup hony b u t
this ver b when used in the sens e o f t /z er e n s etc precedes
its su b j ect : c u m C a e s a r e s s e t i n G a l l i a e r a t c o n i fi r at i é w nen
66
66
H
Ca es a r w a s i n Go a l t/z er e w a s a consp i ra cy
4
[
5
M 4 7 1 A 344
G 6 7 2—6 74 B 348
1
.
.
,
,
,
.
,
,
'
,
.
,
,
I II
,
.
.
c.
.
.
U CL
:
.
.
.
,
:
.
Adj ective s and Genitives unless emp hatic follow h e i r
n ouns
D e m on stratives and adj ectives o f quantity and o f
num b er precede their noun s d u as l e g i on e n o v as c On s o r i b i t
no en r o ll s t w o n ew l eg i ons
When a noun is m odified b y
b oth an adj ective a n d a genitive the usual order is A d j ec
tive Genitive N o u n i n c o m m fi n i B el g ar m c o n c i l i O i n fil e
1
1
6
I
M
6
6
comm on cou nci l o
e B el a e
&
M
4
7
4
( 7
75 (5 5
f
g
A 344 z & é G O7 O & R I
B 35 I
2
.
,
,
.
s
,
.
‘
,
‘
,
u
,
a
,
.
3
e Os
.
.
.
.
,
.
.
.
,
0,
Adver b s gen erally precede the words they modify
.
m ag n o p e r e
ea r n es
G
,
:
,
.
,
6 77
.
t ly
B
,
.
lz e
35 0 ,
c oh or t
s et
at u s p r o f e c t u s
‘
on z
.
[H
.
es
6 7 2 —6 74 , 6 7 8
ft er
t, a
ex
M
.
h or l l ng l /z em
‘
47
1
.
A
.
5
344
,
.
DAT a
N
g
4
M
.
C O MP O S IT I ON
1
47
A
.
and interrogatives generally b egin their
q u a e r e r e t q u a e c i v i t at é s i n a r m i s e s e n t w k en
cu m
w er e i n
s t a t es
G
344 a
,
.
‘
s
w ha t
a s k ed
5
.
C on j unction s
.
clauses
lee
P RO SE
(
6 75
.
B
.
.
35
0,
5
,
ar
a
ms
H
6
[
75
677
:
.
.
,
8
:
Prep os itions regularly p recede ; b u t with a m odified
noun th e order is fre quent ly M odifier Prep osition N oun
.
,
su
II
mmé
cu
M
,
.
m l a u d e , w i t /Z l
1
47
A
.
34 5 ,
.
a
G
.
.
s t l z on or s
/
z
e
g
a
R
6 78
.
2
B
.
.
,
H
[
.
35
0,
.
6 7 1, 5
( 5 69
6 76
:
,
I
n
8
:
]
7
The words f e r é p a en e p r o p e a u t em e n i m q u i d e m
q u o q u e V er a an d usua l ly i ra q u e n ever stand first : h i e
e n i m v e n t u s a b s e p t e n t r i On i b u s o r i t u r
l
i
r i s es i n
o
r
l
m
w
n
d
f
M 4 7 1 A 345 o G 6 7 7 R I 6 79
Me n or t h
[ H 6 77 ( 5 69 I I I )
B 35 9
6
.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
'
,
.
.
.
,
.
.
.
,
.
.
,
.
:
.
.
,
S tudy carefully t h e auth or s arrangement of words and
notic e why t he order varies fro m t h e regular arrange
ment
’
,
.
LE S S O N I I
S i mpl e Agr eement s
39 6
39 9
18 2
:
1 79 :
4
-
:
2 89 :
2 11 :
25
0
4 4
:
6
2
(3
184 :
2 90 :
6
25
6
3 3
:
:
A
.
.
1
2
:
3
3 20 :
R el a t i v es
.
6
3 8
:
176 :
173 :
2
:
8
3
3 25 :
H
8
[
3 7
.
88
3
:
4 3 9 : 44 5 : 4 60 )
1 7 7 : 1 8 2— 1 8 7 : 1 9 8 :
1 6 6— 1 6 9 :
6 14
438
1
:
37
—
M
:
B
.
.
39 3
:
20 4
-
:
39 4
1 74 =
177
G
.
20 3
.
2 33—2 3 5 :
2
5
:
0
1
7
A n oun denoting the same person or thing as an other
noun agrees with it in case S uch a n oun may b e eith er
an app ositive (i e in the same p art of the senten ce ) or a
predicate noun (i e on e used to form the predicate with
the verb s u m o r a ver b o f S imilar meaning ) : a d fl fim e n
A x o n a m t o no r i v er A r on a ; L a b i én u s e r a t l e g a t u s L o oz e
2
M
6
i
h
t
8
H
w
na s
w a s l i eu t ena n t
74
9 (3
39 3
[
168
1
6
1
2
A
G
0
B
2
1 9
1
2
1
1
6
1
i
t
h
o
8
w
&
3 5
7
3
4
3
7
7
.
.
,
.
.
.
.
"
,
’
,
.
81
2 :
1 69,
.
:
,
a
2 :
,
.
.
.
.
:
:
:
.
2
.
.
1
:
,
INT ROD U CT I ON
9
adj ective is put into the same gender num b er
and case as the noun it limits : r el i q u as l e g i an és i n a c i e
lz e d r ew up t b e ot ner l eg i on s i n l i n e of ba t t l e
c on s t i t u i r
b
289
i
M
A
1
6
w
t
h
G
2
0
B
1
8
2
8
2
H
9
4
3
35 ]
7
39 4
[
8
An
-
.
,
,
.
,
.
.
a
,
.
.
:
.
.
.
:
.
A relative agrees with its antecedent in gender and
num b er ; the case depends u p on the construction o f its
own C lause : d a l e g i On és q u a e c an s c r i p t a e e r a n t i n Ga l l i a m
m i s i t b e s en t t /z e t w o l eg i ons w /z i eb l i a d been en r ol l ed i n t o
M
1
2
1
1
6
8
A
H
a
a
8
G
1
6
Ga n l
9
99
44
3
3
9
4
(
5
5
[
B 25 0 1 25 1
9
.
u
s
,
.
:
,
,
.
.
.
.
.
.
,
A verb and its sub j ect agree in num b er and p erson
10
.
cas
tr a
a
t ae
ca
mp
8:
:
.
.
m p l i u s mi l i b u s p a s s u u m
ex
M
1
t en d ed
1 7 4, 1
.
A
20 4
.
G
.
o c t c)
i n l at i t fi d i n e m p a t é b
/
z t m i l es i n br ea d t /z
g
m or e t /i a n
.
'
'
ei
211
.
B
.
2
.
5 4,
ant
,
H
8
8
[
3
.
.
I
LESSON I I I
P er i ph r a s t i c
5
2 6—5
40
14 7 :
B
.
(
1 15 :
38 8
2 34 :
2 33 :
2 32 :
Conj u g at i ons
2 7 6—2 8 1 :
189, 1 :
2
57
:
4
:
M
466
2 9 3, a
—26
T ens es
.
& b,
2 9 3,
1
2 :
.
98
:
294
.
—
20 7 :
G
.
[H
0
3 5
1 29 :
-
236 :
.
1
:
3 3
35
2 2 3— 2 4
7
237 :
2
:
.
43 :
A
.
25 1 :
129
35 5
.
L]
S uch E nglish expression s a s Ca es a r i n t en d s or i s
a bou t t o d o t /i i s
are tran sl a ted into Latin b y using the
active p eri p hrastic conj ugation : C a e s a r h Oc f a c t fi r u s e s t
2
6
H
M 98 1 A 29 3
o
Ca es a r i n t en d s t o d o t b i s
3
[
1
2
G 1 2 9 24 7 B
11
.
,
,
.
.
.
:
.
.
.
,
.
.
a
,
,
.
S uch E nglish expressions as Ca es a r m o s t or na s t o
d o t b i s and fi ns m a s t be d on e by Ca es a r are tr a n s l a ted into
L a tin b y u s In g the p assive peri p hrastic conj ug a tion the
agent b eing expressed by the D ative case : C a e s a r i h OC
12
.
,
LAT I N P RO SE CO MP O S I T I ON
IO
f a c i en d u m es t Ca es a r b a d
M 9 8 2 2 0 7 A 2 3 2 2 94 G
t o d o tb i s
,
:
,
.
13
.
:
.
.
.
25 1 :
35 5
[H
.
B
.
.
237 :
.
43 1
189, L
1 15 :
(
2 34 :
]
meaning w /z i l e takes the Present I ndicative
even when referring to p ast t ime : d m h e c g e r u n t u
C a es a r d i s c es s er a t
w ni l e t /z i s w a s g oi ng on Ca es a r b a d
H
6
2
III
M
G 2 29 R
A 2 76
d epa r t ed
4
4
[
5 33
35
( 7
B 2 9 3 L]
Du m,
.
,
,
u
a
,
r,
,
'
,
.
.
,
,
.
.
.
e.
,
.
,
.
,
.
14
The I mperfect i s used to den ote the c ontinuan ce or
rep etition o f an action in p ast time ; the Perfect to denote
the S imp le occurrence : a d e u m c r eb ri r fi m Or é a d f e r éb a n t u r
c l s s i D a ri m p a e f é c i t
m a ny r ep or t s w er e br ong /t t t o li i m
.
,
s
,
a
be p a t Da tis i n
4 7 1,
I
II )
2 62,
2 :
B
.
M
.
.
co
m ma nd
1
0
6
,
3
3
-
0
3
:
f
o
7
t /z e
A
.
fl
eet
277 :
.
r
,
[ H 5 34 : 5 3 7 (4 6 8 :
469
.
.
2 79
G
.
23 1 :
.
2 39
B
.
2 60 , 1
.
]
With i a m i a m d i fi i a m d fi d u m the Present often de
n otes an action b egun in p ast time and continuing in the
pre sent ; the I m perfect denote s an action c ontin uing in
p ast time b u t b egun at some previous time i a m d i fi c u p i o
n ow for a l ong t i m e 1 b o n e been d es i r i ng ; i a m a nd m c u p i é
b a m I b a d been d es i r i ng f or a l ong t i m e ; a d m o rt e m t é
C a t i l i n a d fi c i i a m p i d e m o p o r t éb a t l o ng S i nce C at i l i n e 0 11n
1
I
6
III
2
6
H
o lz a Z/ e been l ed t o d ea l /Z
ou
t
4
4
9
3
33
7
[
(
5
5 5
y
2 7 b
2 30
2 34
2
II
M 3 0 5 6 30 6 4 A 2 7 6
G
B
7
59 4
15
,
,
.
,
,
,
u
,
,
'
r
,
'
,
:
,
.
,
.
a :
,
.
:
,
.
.
,
,
,
,
,
:
:
,
,
.
.
2
.
,
,
.
:
LESSON IV
U s es
6 20
A
.
:
64 1
29, z
2
4 3:
16
verb
,
:
ez
t h e Infini t i v e
H
0
[
7
.
.
64 2
(
:
f
42,
2 4O ,
2
II
7
,
2, N
0 —2
.
2
:
7
:
5
27
2 3,
5
:
I
:
5
288 :
:
41
5
:
60 6
M
2
3
3 3 6,
1
&A
.
:
.
60 7
:
6 13
28,
3
:
G
.
:
6 14
260 —2 7 6
2 7 9— 2 8 1 :
4 20
6 17
:
:
:
39 2
422
.
:
B 1 5 3 2 70 3 25
The I nfinitive mood h a s the q ualities o f b oth a
an d a n oun I t i s a verb b ecause it denotes tim e
65 0
.
Of
:
65 3
.
.
:
,
.
:
I NT ROD U CT I ON
relative to t h a t o f the sentence in wh ich it stands gov
erns the s a m e case a s it doe s in its other moods is li m ited
b y adver b s and m a y have a su b j ect which su b j ect is in
the Accusative case [ H 4 I 5 60 6 ( 5 3 2
M 6 1 66 A
t
r
G
2
B
0
b
f
2
0
4
4 f
79
7
,
,
,
,
2
17
e
no e
:
,
e o e
.
20
:
.
:
:
.
.
2
.
2
:
.
.
T h e I nfinitive as a noun is neuter : tr an s i r e
.
ra t
d i ffi c i l l i m u m ,
0
2
H
4
7 ( ,
[
.
II
,
to
M
2,
.
2 8,
3
r i v er
t /i e
cr os s
A
.
G
2 9, 2, e
.
.
.
.
‘
was
.
2
2
4
d i fiz on l t
v ery
B
.
flfi m e n
.
15
.
,
The I nfinitive is regularly used with its su b j ect
Accus a tive as the o b j ect o f ver b s which express or i m p ly
thought o r feeling This use is called I ndirect Discourse
b ec a use the quoted tho u ght I S n ot stated in the words o f
the thinker b u t is mad e a part of the who le senten ce : e Os
18
,
.
,
,
.
,
p u l s Os
pu
ta t
di x
es s e
c On f i r m
‘
ar i
r eg n u m
t /i a t i t i s t o t ne i r
l li
A
.
o
P
2 72 :
er s
i a ns
6
33 ,
1
a
:
.
G
65 0
.
B
.
P
sa
i d t na t l /t es e w er e d efea t ed
r ar u m
e s
d v a n t ag e t o
I
H
6
[
3
.
.
ba d
er a m ,
6 14
64 1
I
1
33 ,
.
:
s
es s e,
li e l /t i n/és
t r eng t nen t b e k i ng d om
(5
64 2
:
t
ti i l e
ipsis
23 ,
I
M
:
,
.
2 68 :
f
o
39 2
.
I L]
The I nfinitive is o ften used to comp lete a verb al
idea as in E nglis h after ca n d a r e etc This is called the
C o m p le m entary I nfinitive s u b i d i c o n l o c a i n c m p o t e a n t
26
i
1
2
r es er v es cou l d n ot be s t a t i on ed
H
6
0
t
h
8
M
w
[
7
A 7 G 4 3 B 328
19
.
,
,
.
,
'
s
a
.
2
1
.
2
.
.
.
:
,
.
.
r
r
.
,
1.
,
I n the comple m ent a ry I nfinitive the Present tense
is gener a lly used I n the I nfinitive of indirect discourse
the Present ten se st a nd s for t h e Present I ndicative t h e
Future for the Future or the Future Perfect a n d t h e Per
fe ct f o r the I m p erfect Perfect o r Plu p erfect ( cf
— 6 20
—
1
H
6
M
1
A 88
G
2
6
0
[
7
3 l t p t f 61
336 A
—
2 80
1 ( )
28 1 1
2
B 2 70
65 3
2
20
.
,
.
,
,
,
.
,
.
,
a
:
,
:
,
:
,
.
.
.
as
ar
.
1
2
o
a
e,
.
.
2
,
e :
,
.
.
LAT I N P RO SE C O MP O S IT I O N
12
LESSO N V
Abl at i v e
A
.
2
55
2 90
:
.
Ab s ol u t e
G 2 8 2 40 9
:
.
—
.
[H
B
.
48 9
.
:
1
4
3
(
640
M
:
2
.
55
:
2 79
.
227 :
The A b lative A b so lute stands un connected in gram
m a t i c a l c on struction with the rest of th e sentence
21
.
.
V arious ideas as of Time C ause C on cession C on
dition Previous A ction etc expressed in E nglis h b y a
clause m ay b e tran slated into Latin by the u s e Of t h e
A b lative ab solute
22
,
,
.
,
.
,
,
,
,
.
The A b lative a b solute though u sed with th e Pres
is commonly u sed where in E nglish th e idea is ex
en t
p ressed b y th e Perfect active p articiple A s th ere is n o
Perfect active p articiple in Latin th e Perfect p assive parti
c i p l e in th e A b l ative a b solute con struction must b e used
G a l l i a p ac a t a C a e s a r a d I t a l i a m p r o f e c t u s e s t na v i ng s a b
23
,
.
,
.
,
,
,
d n ed Ga n l , Ca es a r
24
s et
ou t
I n dep onent verb s
f
or
I t a ly
.
h owever th e Perfect p assive
p articiple h aving an active m ean ing directly tran slates
the E nglish Perfect active p articiple an d th e A b lative
a b solute is rarely u sed : h o s t es a d o r t i f u g av ér u n t li a r/ i ng
.
,
,
,
,
,
'
,
a
t t a ck ed t ae
my
en e
,
t ney
p
a
t t aem t o
fl
i
b
t
g
.
N OT E
D o n ot use th e A b lative a b solute when the
p articiple i n Latin ca n agree w ith e ither th e su bj ect o r
th e o b j ect of the predicate : h o s t es i m p e d i t os v i c i t b e d e
fla m m a
fea t ed t ae en emy w /z i l e t aey w er e i mp ed ed ei
t er r ified by M o
p e r t e r r i t i c l a s s i ar i i m a n er e mc m a u d é b a n t
i
a me o
t
i
s
s
r
e
a
e
n
t
n
a
i
l
r
s
d
i
o
d
a
r
e
m
n
o
d
n
t
f
fl
—
,
us
,
'
,
,
.
I NT ROD U CT I ON
13
LESSO N V I
Q
u es
ti ons
0
3
2 12
.
G
10 9 :
.
An s w er s
a nd
1 10 :
5
35
:
45
1—3
0 —4 5
9
53
H
[
.
M 83
:
.
— 66
2
6
4
4
:
183 :
.
:
37 7 4
85
1 :
,
— 1
6
8
47
4
:
— 80
8
37 3
:
:
1
B
.
5
— 86
8
3 4 3
16 2 :
:
0
9
.
5
:
.
00
3 ,
65 0
11 :
A
2 10
4,
a
.
]
Questions in Latin are n ot S hown b y the order o f
the words
There S hould usually b e t w o S igns of a dire ct
question : ( I ) an interrogative word a t the b eginning ;
2
a
mark
at
the
end
o f interrogation
( )
25
.
.
.
26
a ffixed t o the most imp ortant word
generally
n e shows
to the ver b which then stan ds first
merely
that a question is asked an d does not im p ly the kind o f
answer expected : e r a t n e M i l t i a d es A t h en i en s i s ? w a s M i l
1
1
i
h
2
t
M
H
8
2
w
8
8
t i a d es a n A t /t en i a n
(
37
3 5
[
35
A 10
G 45 4 B 162 2
n e IS
-
.
-
,
.
,
.
.
2
27
,
.
a
.
.
N on n e
.
.
(
n on
,
-
,
.
1
:
.
,
ne
S
hows
that
an
a
f
firmative
answer
)
is expected N m S h ows that a n eg a tive answer is exp ected
n On n e C i c e r o Or a t o r f u i t ? w a s n ot C i cer o a n o r a t or ? n u m
C i c e r o A t h en i en s i s e r a t ?
Ci cer o w a s n ot a n A t b en i a n w a s
M 3 8 5 3 8 4 A 2 10
G 45 5 4 5 6
be
[ H 378 (35 I N 2
B 162
)
u
.
‘
,
1,
.
,
.
28
,
.
:
,
.
.
,
.
c
.
:
.
.
2, a
When an interrogative pronoun or adver b introduces
?
i
m
d
u
e
i
the q uestion do not use n a n on n e or n u m : q
t
w /i oni d i d b e s ee ? q u om o d o T h e m i s t o c l es m o rt u u s e s t ?
.
v
-
,
,
,
h ow d i d Tnem i s t ocl es d i e
29
I n tr a ns lating into Latin for the word b ow in such
ex p re s sions a s no w ea s i ly no w i l l u s t r i o ns etc use q u a m
u n less so m e s p eci a l interrog a tive word like q u a n t u s now
r ea t
uot
a ci l e
uam
or
l
i
used
q
f
o
a
w
i
n
:
n
e
C
a
n
t
e
b
c
,
q
g
y
.
,
,
,
,
.
,
,
,
.
LAT I N P R O SE CO MP O S IT I ON
I4
C
r
a es a
G a l l Os
‘
i ci t
v
Ga n l s ? q u o t
bow
?
h omi nu m
ea s
i ly
Ca es a r
did
i n t er f e c t i
sun
t
m en
m a ny
b ow
?
tb e
con q u er
w er e b i l l ed
A n an swer in Latin corr esp on ding to
30
is
gener
y
the verb o r some other
no
b y suc h rep etition
.
es
ally expres sed b y the rep etition o f
e mphatic word ; corresp onding t o
?
D
i
a
D i s c es s i t
i
s
s
s
i
t
n
a
l
i
n
W ith a n egative :
C t
ce
e
D id
?
i
l
b
i
R
m
M
a
d
s
h
i
n
l
e
r
O
a
e
e
e
a
b
t
a
a
t
p
t
a
t
i
i
e
a
t
Y
e
s
n
C
d
?
,
,
‘
.
.
R om a e
N an
( 3 5 3,
8:
1
D i d M i l t i a d es l i v e
.
t N
wi h
2,
M
.
.
38 6
A
.
.
I n a d ou b le question
8:
2 12
t R om e ?
a
a
G
.
47 1
.
B
.
No
1 6 2,
.
H
E 3 79
.
.
5
,
8: b
a
.
]
tr u m o r n e stand s with the
fi rst p art and a n ( a n n on in dire ct n e c n e I n Indire ct ques
tion s or n ot ) at the b eginning o f the second : u t r u m C i c e r o
an
C a e s a r m ai o r e r a t
w a s Ci cer o or Ca es a r t b e g r ea t er
1
0
1
1
1
H
8
0
6
I
2
i
t
h
N
M
N
A
2
G
8
:
8
:
w
8
:
i
3
3
3
[
( 5
5
B 1 6 2 4 300 4 ]
4 5 8 45 9
31
.
,
u
-
,
,
,
:
.
:
.
,
:
,
.
.
,
a
,
,
.
.
.
.
.
LESSON VI I
Obj ect Ca s es
4 12 :
4 13 :
4 1 6, 2 :
N
3 8 1 8:
333
,
8
:
3 34
.
(3 7
1
1 :
.
[H
.
.
:
t
:
19
194 :
G
0
:
4
3
.
i
h
w
,
4
37
:
2 40 ,
3 39
R :
3 73
1 :
1 90 — 19 2
184 :
.
2, R :
Accu s a tiv e
.
8:
42 1
M
w i th N
.
2 39, 1
2 :
I
343,
1
.
.
5
— 06 :
0
4 4 4
8:
:
19 8 :
3 30 :
B
.
N
2
.
1
33
— 11
0
4 9 4
376
3
20 0
&
R
.
1 7 2— 1 7 9 , 1 :
A
.
1 :
.
3 78, I
:
237
3 33
18 3
—
2
8:
4
,
-
2 39
1, R
.
1
]
M any verb s which in E nglish h ave a direct o b j ect
in Latin govern n ot the Accusative case b u t the Genitive
D a tive o r Ab lative : s e n at u i p e r s u ad e r b e p er s u a d es t b e
s en a t e
er n 6 n p l a c e t
i t d oes n ot p l ea s e b i m
32
.
,
,
,
,
.
,
33
The direct o b j ect of a transitive verb is in the Accu
sative n fi n t i u m m i s i t b e s en t a m es s eng er EH 4O4 40 5
M 1 8 4 A 2 3 7 G 3 30 B 1 7 2 1 7 6
.
.
,
.
.
.
.
-
.
.
.
,
.
=
INT RO DU CT I ON
34
I5
A second Accus a tive denoting the same person
or
,
.
thing a s the direct o b j ect is sometimes used
gener a lly
—
as a predic a te Accusative
with ver b s o f n a m ing choos
ing m a king etc : C i c e r On e m c On s u l e m c e av er u n t tb ey
1
i
0
h
1
H
w
8
2
t
M 19 1
el ect ed Ci cer o ( t o be) con s u l
4
[
A 2 39 1 8
G 3 40 B 1 7 7 I 8
,
,
,
,
r
.
: a
,
.
.
.
:
,
.
.
.
.
:
,
.
.
,
An Accusative o f th e person is sometimes used with
the Accus a tive o f the thing after ver b s o f teaching and
asking But so me verb s such as p e t 6 p o s t u l o an d q u e r o
take an A b l a tive of the person with a p rep osition instead
b e l l i r t i on em d o c eb a t b e t a n /i t
o f the Accusative : m ni t é
g
t bc s ol d i er s i b e a r t of w a r ; a u i l i u m a L a c e d a e m o n i i s p e t ?
1
1
H
tb ey a s b ed a i d of t b c L a ced a em on i a ns
v er n t
4
4
[
1
2
i
1
M
A
t
N
G
2
2
8
w
h
R
I
8
2
N
8
9
9
3
339
3
( 3 74
B 1 78 1 )
35
.
,
.
,
a
,
,
‘
s
a
,
x
u
.
,
,
2,
: c,
,
.
.
.
:
.
:
.
.
a
,
,
.
.
.
.
2—
.
Transitive ver b s when c omp ounded with c i r c u m o r
tr an s may take t w o A cc u s a t i v es z e q u i t es fl fi m e n t r ad i i i t
M 19 4 A
b e l ed t b c ca v a l ry a cr os s t b e r i v er
[ H 4 13
1 79
R 1 B 1 75 2 ) 8
o G 33 1
2 39
36
,
.
x
,
.
.
,
2,
.
.
.
.
,
.
,
:
a
.
.
,
.
,
An intransitive verb so metimes takes the Accusa
tive o f a noun of S imilar meaning generally q ualified b y
an adj ective (cf the E nglish t o l i v e a g ood l ife) This is
the C ognate ( kindred meaning ) Ac cusative
O ften an
adj ective in the neuter Accusative is thus used s u b s t a n
b on m
i tam
I eb a t b e l i v ed a g ood l ife
l
i
m
u
m
fi
t i v ely
p
v
l eb a t b e b a d a v ery g r ea t i nf l u en ce
[ H 40 9 8 1 ( 3 7 1 II )
R B 1 76 2
M 190 A 2 3 8 G 3 33 I R
3 33
37
.
,
.
.
.
v
a
a
v
v
r
,
,
.
.
.
,
.
.
,
.
1 :
,
2,
.
:
.
.
.
,
.
,
A n euter adj ective or prono un is o ften u s ed with
?
i
h
m
d
O
c
c
e
t
adverb i a l force : q
f t
w /zy w a s t b i s d on e
1
1
H
1
6
I
M
8
A
0
G
8
8
8
b
4
4
9
9
(37
[
5
3 33 1 R 2 334
B 76
8 R
38
.
a
u
.
:
.
,
.
2
1
,
,
:
.
:
s
u
.
.
2
,
a
:
.
.
,
,
.
:
LAT I N P RO SE C O MP O S IT I ON
I6
39
"
Th e A ccus ative gen erally m odified b y an adj ective
is used in exclamation s : o f o r t un a t os c i v es O for t u na t e
1
H
2
1
1
8
8
N
M
2
A
G
8
00
2
o
c i t i z ens
4
[
3
4
(
34 3 1
B
"
.
,
:
.
,
’
:
.
.
.
.
a
,
.
.
,
.
.
LESSO N VI I I
Ob j ect Ca s es
t
wi h
M
5
2,
8: N —444 :
.
2 2 5 —2 3 0
2 16 :
.
8
2
3
B
.
Gen i t i v e
44 9 4 5
A
( 39 6
45 3 45 8
G
.
H
9
44
[
.
.
—
1 :
2 1 6—2 2 2
.
P a rtiti v e Gen it i v e
.
.
—
.
20 1 :
2 00 :
.
2
363
.
III
,
:
8:
IV
39 7
:
36 7 3 72
3 74
:
-
:
:
,
3 9 9 : 40 6
—
6
8
3 7 3 7 : 38 1
20 6
20 4 :
An O b j ective Genitive is use d with n ouns which
den ote action or feeling i m p e r i m G a l l i a e tb e r u l e of (o ver )
2
6
H
0
III
M
2
1
6
A
2
1
G
B
6
2
200 8
Ga u l
44
[
(39
3 3
)
7
40
.
u
,
,
.
.
.
.
,
.
.
.
.
,
.
:
.
An O b j ective Genitive is u sed with adj ectives o f i m
plied action t o defin e their referen c e c o n i ur at i on i s m e m o r
h fii u s c o n i u g i i c u p i d u s Ga l l i as f u i t
m i n df ul of t b c con sp i r a cy
41
.
Co l l i a s w a s d es i r ou s
I 8 II )
:
M
.
.
2 2 6, 1
8:
2
tb is
f
A 2 18
o
.
.
,
a
a
l l i a n ce
H
0
8
:
4
[
5
.
.
G
8: b
.
t N
i
h
w
3 74
,
.
1 :
45
4 8: 5
.
B
.
42
,
(39 9
45 3
1
,
,
2 04,
.
With verb s o f rem em b ering an d forgetting a p ers on
used as o b j ect is usually p ut in th e Genitive ; a th ing thus
used is p ut in eith er th e Genitive or th e Ac cusative V erb s
o f rem em b ering in th e sense o f recalling take generally
th e A cc us ative s o c i or u m m e m i n i t b e r em em bers b i s a l l i es
,
.
.
,
i ll am
(
45 5
1 8:
re
m
40 6 ,
I
r ec o r d o r ,
M
II :
r eca l l
227
.
A
.
tb a t
.
,
ci r cu
2 19
b
.
ms t a nce
.
G
t R
h
6
w
i
,
37
.
H
45 4
[
I 8: 2
1— 4
.
.
.
B
.
20 6 ,
2 :
V erb s o f ac cusing con demning an d ac quitting take
the Genitive of th e C h a rge or the Penalty : M i l t i a d es p r o
43
.
,
d i t i c mi s
a c c us
H
6
4
[
5
1—4
‘
.
(
at u s
40 9 ,
II
es
:
t,
4 10 ,
,
M i l t i a d es w a s
II )
.
M
.
228
.
A
.
a ccu s ed
2 20
.
G
.
f
t r ea s on
R
B
o
8
&
37
.
.
20 8 ,
.
18
C O M PO SI T I O N
LATI N PRO SE
tran sitive verb toget h er with th e direct o b j ect ; o r ( 2 ) with
an intran sitive verb w ith out a dire ct o b j ect : T h e m i t o c l e
Tb em i s t ocl es d evo t ed b i ms elf t o p u b/1c
r e i p ii b l i c a e s é d e d i t
H
2
C i c e r on i r e s p o n d e t b e re p l i es t o Ci cer o
af a i r s
4
[
3 4 4
M 20 5
A 2 2 5 2 6 G 34 5 3 4 6 3 5 2
4 5 ( 3 8 4 I 8 II )
B 1 8 7 I 8 II ]
,
s
,
s
,
f
,
,
2
:
:
,
.
:
,
.
.
.
2
:
.
:
.
.
2
:
.
.
0,
:
.
.
Th e D ative is used with m any verb s b oth tr a n si
tive an d intran sitive comp ounded with the prep o sitions d
i n i n t e r O b p o s t p r a e p r O s u b s p e r and so m e
c on
an te
times c i r c u m
C onsult th e lexicon freely fo r these co m
pounds : Ga l l i s b el l u m i n f e r éb a t b e w a s ma b i ng w a r up o n
H
2
2
2
1
M
A
G
B
20
2
8 7 III
8
8
t b e Ga n /s
4 9
3
[
34 7
w i th 1 8
48
,
.
a
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
u
,
,
,
.
,
:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
,
,
:
Th e D ative (especially o f a person ) is u sed with
m any ver b s of d epriving in stead o f th e A b lative o f sep a
ration (C f 5 3 ) s c u t m m i l i t i d et r a i t b e s na tcb ed t b e s bi el d
fr om i b e s ol d i er [ H 4 7 4 2 9 2 ( 3 8 5 2 3 8 6
M 2 1 1 A 2 29
G 3 45 8 R 1 3 4 7 R 5 B 1 8 8 2 t ]
49
.
,
u
.
:
:
.
,
2
.
.
.
x
.
.
.
:
,
,
,
,
,
:
,
.
.
.
.
a
50
The D ative is used with many adj ectives especially
tho se o f fitness n earness and likene ss : A l c i b i a d i p ar n em o
i n c i v i t a t e p On é b a t u r
n o on e i n t b c s t a t e w a s con s i d er ed
H
2
8
:
1
I
M
A
G
2
1
2
A l ci bi a d es equ a l
4
4
[
3
9
4
3
4
(
3
)
2
1
8
B
1
9
35 9
.
,
‘
,
,
,
,
.
.
.
.
,
.
.
.
.
a.
,
.
:
,
Th e D ativ e is often used when it refers to the
senten ce as a whole rath er th an to any o n e word a n d
denote s th e person to wh ose I nterest the action occurs
i h i i n a n i m m v én i t i t
This is th e D a tive o f referenc e : m
H
2
2
8
M
8
ca m e t o my a t t en t i on
4 5
4 43 ( 3 84 4
[
2 b ]
A 2 35 w t h 8 t G 35 3 5 1 3 5 3 B
209
51
.
,
,
.
u
.
.
.
.
,
r
a
:
.
.
0 :
2
:
,
:
:
.
,
.
:
,
.
,
20
I NT ROD U CT I ON
I9
LESSO N X
t i on , P r i ce
M
4 22 :
G
39 5
0
39 :
.
39 7
:
1
6
4
.
46 5
— 6
6
4 7 4 9
:
47 7
:
0
6
:
4
40 7
B
.
2 14 :
.
4 78
:
A
2 38 , 1 :
-
0
4 4:
:
-
2 36
2 34 :
.
.
.
H
[
.
S ep a r a t i on, S ou r ce, S p eci fica
i
l
e
A
a
t
b
v
4
Ob j ect Ca s es
243 :
.
21
5
:
(
0
8
4
:
2 44 :
I &
2 18,
— 1
1
4 3 4
2 49 :
2
2 :
5
22
5
5
42 1
:
2 :
2
53
.
:
The A b l a tive i s used W ith Ii t o fr u o fu n g o r p o t i o r
and their comp ounds : q u o u qu e a b fit er e p a t i e n t i a
v es c o r
1
H
2
I
a r w i l t t b ou a b s e o u r p a t i en ce
n o s t r a b ow
47 7
[
(4
f
u
I ) M 2 5 3 A 2 49 G 40 7 B 2 1 8 I ]
52
'
r
.
r
,
,
,
s
,
,
.
,
.
,
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
,
,
.
The A b lative o f separation without a prepo sition is
used with verb s o f freeing rem oving needing an d d ep r i v
ing C ompounds o f a b d e and e x generally rep e at the
preposition with the A b lative when expressing motion o r
separation C onsult the lexicon freely for the se word s
m e t u k h a r a t i s u n t t b ey w er e r el i ev ed of (fr om ) t b e i r fea r ;
T h e m i s t o c l es e c i v i t a t e ei e c t u s e s t
Tb em i s tocl es w a s ba n
— 6
2
M
2
6
A
i s b ed fr om t b e s t a t e
H
1
1
6
3
37
4
4 5 (4 3
[
243
G 390 1 2 B 2 14 8 1
53
.
,
.
,
,
,
,
.
‘
'
,
,
.
.
54
,
.
:
.
.
.
.
:
,
.
:
.
S ource is expressed b y th e A b lative with a prep osi
tion b u t with p a rtici p les o f b irth and origin th e p rep osi
tion may b e omitted : B e l g e a b e x tr em i s G a l l i a e fi n i b u s
ori u nt u r
t b e cou n t ry of t b e B elg i a ns beg i n s a t (fr om ) t b e
ex t r em e bo r d er s o
a bi n
n at u s r ég e
o
s
l
e
o
n
G
a
u
t
b
g
f
f
H
6
M 2 3 4 A 2 44 &
G 39 5 B
4
[
7 4 69 ( 4 1 3 4 1 5 8 II )
.
,
’
a
,
.
,
:
.
55
:
:
.
.
.
a
.
.
.
.
.
The A b lative is u sed W it h th e nouns O p and fi u
n eed : v i rt u t e o p u
era t
t b er e w a s n eed of cou r a g e
[ H 477
III (4 14 I V ) M 2 5
A 43
G 4 6 B 2 18
s
,
56
s
us
;
.
.
2
.
,
.
.
2
,
e
.
.
0
.
.
.
s
,
,
,
The A b l a tive i s used to de n ote in Wh a t p a rticul a r
an expression is t o b e r egarded a s true : c el e i t at e s u p e r a
.
r
LAT I N P R O SE C O M P O S IT I ON
20
b
a nt
ex cel l ed
t b ey
,
den ce )
in
M
H
8
0
4
[
.
,
w ift n es s
s
I
238,
.
.
not
in
strength
(
A 2 5 3 G 39 7 B
.
.
.
.
p ru
or
.
The A b lative is used to denote price and definite
value : s es t e r t i u m q u i n q u e m i l i b u s e u m c o r r fi p i t b e br i bed
M 2 5 1 A 2 5 2 G 40 4
b i m w i t b 5 000 s es t er ces
[ H 478
B
57
.
,
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
LESSO N XI
P a s s i v es
( 3 7 3,
8:
M
17 7, a :
0
3
3 ,
c :
0
4
3 ,
II
R
.
6
4
3 ,
1 :
3
.
25
6
R
:
332
G
.
40 1
1 :
.
1
0
4 , 1:
5
:
20 5
19 3 :
,
N
.
2 :
28, 1
8:
1,
.
,
.
z
N :
B
z
24
.
b,
N
2 16 :
2 14 :
2
4 13
1 :
2 39 , 2 ,
20 6 :
.
4 1 1,
4 15
1 :
.
2 39 , 1, a
0
c
,
33
2 :
N
184,
:
2 :
,
3 8 4,
N :
2 3 7, a :
8:
1
3 7 6,
1 :
2 30 :
b,
.
1 74 ,
.
2 16 :
b:
,
3 74 ,
2 :
0
H
4 4
[
.
17 7,
.
4 2 6, 3
:
4 64
7
8:
1
,
465
:
2 :
.
2 :
:
468
5 34
:
2 74
N
2 3 9 , c,
A
.
.
t
2 :
611
wi h N
1,
.
18 :
5
:
1
.
14 6 , a
’
.
24 6 :
2 48 ,
2 17 :
3
:
178, 2
8:
1 79,
a :
3
:
18
7,
]
Th e following ch ange s (5
o
ccur
in
p
assin
from
g
)
the active to th e p assive con stru ction :
—
8 62
The direct O bj ect o f th e active voice b ecomes th e
su b j ect o f th e p assive wh ile th e su b j ect o f the active
b ec ome s eith er th e A b lative of agent with a o r a b o r the
A b lative o f mean s with out a p repo sition
A ctive : A q u i t an i V a l er i u m i n t e r f éc é r u n t i b e A qu i t a n i a n s
58
.
,
,
.
,
b i l l ed Va l er i u s
Passive
.
V a l e ri u s
:
A q u i t an i s i n t e r f e c t u s
ab
b i l l ed by t b e A q u i t a n i a ns
H
[
6
4 8
.
z
59
37
:
,
5
18
a z
(
1
4
2 46 :
5
,
I
,
M
.
t,
Va l er i u s
wa s
.
2 :
2 48 , c
es
G
.
2 14 :
1 8 4,
.
2 16 :
N
1 :
.
40 1
.
247, 1
B
8:
2
.
A
.
1 7 7, a
.
V erb s o f creating c alling etc C h ange b oth o b j ect
Accusative s of th e active to N omin atives
Active : C i c e r On e m c On s u l e m c r e av er u n t t b ey el ect ed Ci cer o
.
,
,
.
,
cons u l
.
I NT ROD U CT I ON
P a ssive
[
H 4 10 ,
.
:
r
Ci ce o
(3 73
1
c On s u
M
,
1
.
t
l
c t ea u s
74 3
,
A
.
es
t,
I,
a
239 ,
.
Ci cer o w a s
N
,
I
2
2
.
G
.
.
el ect ed co n s u l
R
0
4
3 ,
1
.
B
.
.
1 7 7,
.
V er b s of asking de m anding etc m a y retain o n e
Accusative u sually t h at of th e thing asked dem a nded
etc ; b u t few verb s of this cl ass are used in th e Pa s s 1v e
Active A r i s t i d en s e n t e n t i a m r o g av er u n t t b ey a s b ed A r i s t i
d es b i s op i n i on
Passive : A ri s t i d es s e n t e n t i a m r o g at u s e s t A r i s t i d es w a s
a s b ed b i s op i n i on
M
1
2
1
2
A
N
N
B
1
2
G
8
H
1
&
4
9
4
3
9
3
]
7
[
60
,
,
.
.
,
,
,
.
.
,
.
,
.
.
,
.
.
c,
,
.
.
.
.
.
.
a
,
.
.
V erb s which in the active govern the D ative must
b e used imp ar s on a l l y in the p assive while the D ative is
retained
Active : n av i b u s n o c eb a n t t b ey i nj u r ed t b e s b ip s
Pass i ve : n av i b u s n o c éb at u r t b c s b zps w er e i nj u r ed
I
M
20
N
A
2
0
G
20
2
2
1
R
H
2
6
8
I
8
6
1
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
[
7
(
5
B 1 8 7 II b ]
61
.
,
.
.
,
.
,
,
,
,
.
,
.
.
.
,
,
.
:
,
.
.
:
,
.
.
.
V erb s of saying thinking etc used in the passive
are usually p erson a l in the Present I mperfect an d Future
and imperson al in th e tense s formed on th e Perfect ste rn
These verb s in the second or passive periphrastic conj uga
tion are im p ersonal I u b e o an d v e t o a r e always p ersonal
in th e passive
Active : p u t am u s C i c e r On em m ax i m u m Or at Or e m R om an u m
f u i s s e w e t b i nb tb a t Ci cer o w a s tb c g r ea t es t R o m a n
62
,
.
.
,
,
,
,
‘
.
.
.
,
or a
t or
P a ssive :
.
Ci cer o i s
t or
I
r
Ci ce o
m ax i m u s
t b oug b t t o
p u t at u m
es
t
r tor
O a
.
611
t N
i
h
I
w
,
,
4
5
3
(
.
C i c e r On e m
I 8:
1 8:
p u t at u r ,
b a v e been t b c g r ea t es t R o ma n
m ax i m u m
i t w a s t b oug b t t b a t Ci cer o w a s t b c g
[H
fu i s s e
R Om an u s
M 2 74
B 332
.
2
.
.
,
.
A
’
—
a a
.
r ea
0
33 ,
8:
N
.
]
b,
fu i s s e
Or at Or e m
‘
t es t
1
8:
or a
2 :
ora
t or
,
.
0
c
,
33
.
G
.
5
28 ,
LAT I N P RO SE CO MP O S I T I ON
22
M any verb s intran s i tive in L a tin are tran si
tive in E nglish and s o in E nglish may b e used personally
in the p a ssive T his however cann ot b e do n e with their
t b e s l a v e w a s sp a r ed s e r v o p a r
Latin e q uivalents ( s ee
Ca u ti on
.
,
,
.
,
,
.
tum
ci
es
t
.
LESSO N X I I
P os s es s i on
8
H
4
3
[
35 3
:
.
8
3 7
:
39 5
2 17 :
433
:
4 34
8:
19 5 :
190 :
63
99 ,
M
44 9 8:
:
1 90 :
a :
0
3 9:
349
6
2
3
:
5
2 :
.
f
8:
2 14 , a
G
c
.
On i a m
A t b en i a ns
tb e
o
R
3 6 2 8:
.
0 1— 0 3
8:
5
1
8
:
:
1
6
9
5
6
:
6
6
4
3
3
19
:
( 3 30
1 64 :
2 12
19
:
B
.
04
5
1 :
8
:
7
a
15 1 :
.
.
I
,
1
5
2
35 9 ,
c ol
in
P r onou n
16 3,
.
Possession is generally exp re ssed
.
co l ony
64
.
w i th N
440 , 1
:
2 4 2—2 4 4 :
19 8 :
A t h en i é n s i u m
.
44 8
.
.
'
A
t
A
G
Ad j ect i v e,
,
i
h
w
,
439
3 &4
2 :
.
.
23 1
c:
N
,
Da t i v e
,
0
43 :
:
:
1
33
2 14 , a
Gen iti v e
:
.
mis s u s
H
4 39
[
1—3 :
366
B
.
.
19
5
th e Genitive
be w a s
t,
0
1
,
44
:
.
.
es
by
( 39 6
,
I)
s en t
M
.
21
.
i n to
a
8:
2
7
.
:
of
I n stead of the Genitive
1
,
personal p ronouns the
possessive adj e ctive s are used agreeing with the thing
p os sessed in gender num b er and c ase I n th e third
p erson n ote the di fferen ce b etween the us e o f s u u s (r e
S u s is an a d e c
flex i v e) and the Genitive Of i s e a i d
j
tive and agrees while i s e a i d i s a pronoun and is used
in th e Genitive case : n o s t ri l i b ri ou r boobs ; s u i s c op i i s
a d ort u s
eO u m
c a s t ra
es t
w i t b b i s for ces b e a t t a cb ed t b e i r
—
1
0
1
p
N
1
H
0
1
0
M
A
8
ca m
44
9
4
4
4
4
44
33
4
3
3
[
(
5
5
0
6
1
1
1
1
I
G
R
6
B
1
1
6
8
8
4
99
95
9
97
3 9 3
3 4
3
II 2 4 7
8
44 I
.
,
,
.
,
,
,
,
,
u
.
,
,
‘
,
r
,
,
:
a :
: a :
,
.
.
2
1 :
,
a
,
:
,
2 :
.
: a
:
,
:
,
,
,
:
.
2,
:
.
.
,
:
.
.
.
.
.
2
,
,
D erivative adj e ctive s are som etimes used to denote
p ossession : P o m p ei a n s of P o mp ey ; a l i en u s bel ong i ng t o
—
N
M
6
6
H
1
8
8
a n ot b er (a l i u s
4
9
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
5
5 (3
5
) [
B 51
19
A 1 64
G 1 8 2 5 8 7 3 6 w i th R 1 8
1 64
8 b
65
.
u
15 2, 1
.
,
c,
a
0 :
.
.
.
,
,
’
:
:
0
.
.
,
:
:
,
:
2,
.
.
.
1
: 2
,
.
2,
:
.
1
I NT ROD U CT I ON
23
Po ssession may b e expressed b y the D ative o f th e
possessor with the verb u m h aving the thing p ossessed
as the su b j ect : T h y b fi l o e r a t c o r on a f a c t a d u ab u s v i g u l i s
66
.
s
,
ras
o l e ag i n i s
,
br a n eb es
,
r
,
Tb r a sy bu l u s
ba d
M
2 12
.
ma de
cr o w n ,
a
A
.
23 1
.
G
.
349
.
f
B
tw o
o
.
ol i v e
.
With the Genitive the po ssessor i s made emp hatic
with the D ative the idea o f possession is more prominent ;
h a b e o and S imil a r ver b s a dd the idea of holding or keep
ing : C a es a i s e e r c i t u s Ca es a r s a r my ; C a e s a r i e e r c i t u s
i
s
a
x
r
t
u
m
h
a
b
b
t
C
a
e
e
e
c
e
r
e r a t Ca es a r b a d a n a r m
e
s
a
r
C
a
;
y
H
0
8
2
1
2
f
t
t
M
N
I
b a d ( a n d kept ) a n a r my
4
3
3
(
7
[
A 2 3 1 R G 349 R 2 8 3 B 3 5 9 I ]
67
,
.
’
x
r
x
,
a
,
.
.
,
.
,
:
.
,
.
.
oo no e
,
.
.
,
,
.
.
.
.
LESSO N X I I I
Des cr i p t i on
46 7
:
B y P hr a s e
2
6
3
(
4 70 :
M
2 1 3 —2 1 5
6
3 5
:
N
3 79
:
.
0
8
3
:
400
363
:
.
2
5
1
B
.
.
8:
N
16 7
.
2
:
5
1 69 :
-
:
39 3
21
1 79 :
.
2 44 :
:
H
39 3 : 43 7
[
.
5
:
395
2 2 1— 2 2 4 :
:
G
& b
2, a
6
9
3 ,
:
.
19 7 :
.
:
439
V:
23
288 :
5
440 , 3
:
40 4
:
:
2 46
20
:
3
t
44 8 , w i h
:
0
:
4 5
A
.
1 84 :
.
2
1
:
3
2
3
5
:
18 5
3 60
20 3 :
To descri b e a noun in E nglish , we m ay u s e such
expressions as a br a v e cons u l ; a cons u l of g r ea t br a v ery
t b e cons u l a br a v e m a n
t b e cons u l i s a br a v e m a n
S o in
Latin there may b e used an adj ective a descri p tive Geni
tive or A b lative an appositive or a p redic a te noun
68
.
,
.
,
,
.
,
69
The Genitive o f description is alw a ys q ualified b y an
adj ective O p s s u m m i l b Or i a t a s b of v ery g r ea t l a bor
H
0
1
6
M
2
A
N
G
B 2 3 i w i th
6
N
2
2
8
V
&
44
[
3 5
3 ( 39
5
.
u
.
,
.
.
.
.
,
2
.
:
.
.
.
.
0
1
A Genitive of m aterial is someti m es used instead
the more co mmon A b lative w ith a preposition : an l u s
70
.
of
,
s
a
,
u
LAT I N
24
au
ri
r i ng
a
,
f (f
A 2 14
70
0
.
’
,
f
g
o
ol d
m ) w oo“
,
2 44
e:
G
.
P
R O SE C O MP O S I T I ON
m ore usually
;
H
0
4
: 3
4
I
3 68
.
B
.
3
,
V
6
(39 ,
47
0
m é n s a é l i g n o,
4 15
:
M
,
a
t a bl e
22 1 :
.
23
5
.
.
71
A descriptive G enitive o f measure is often used
i t er mi l l e p as s u u m
a
ou r n e
H
o 3
o
V
a
6
l
m
i
e
44
[
9
(3
j
y f
)
M 2 2 3 A 2 15 o G 3 65 R 2 B 20 3 2 8
.
.
,
.
.
,
.
.
,
.
.
.
.
.
,
.
:
,
.
,
72
Th e Genitive is used to den ote indefinite value (c f
m ag n i i n t e r e s t i t i s of g r ea t i mp or t a n ce ; i n b e 116 C o n t)
n i s o p e r a m ag n i f u i t
i n t b e w a r Con on s a s s i s t a n ce w a s v a l
0
i
1
H
8
w
t
h
6
0
&
V
M
n a bl e
4
4
4
4
4 (39
3
4 4
[
B 20 3 3 8:
G 3 7 9 3 80 1 8 2
8 b
w th
.
.
“
,
’
'
,
:
,
.
,
:
,
:
'
i
a
:
:
.
.
:
,
.
.
,
Th e A b l ativ e of d escription i s qualified
e ct i v e or a genitive : Ga l l i a r a n t m ag n o c o r p o r e
j
H
2
1
w er e of g r ea t s t a t u r e
4
[
73
(4 9 II ) M 2 46
G 400 B 2 2 4 8 1
73
by
.
‘
.
.
.
.
,
,
.
.
,
.
an
tbe
A
Ga u ls
25 1
.
ad
&
N
.
:
.
For
description th e Genitive an d th e A b lative are
Often used with out distin ction ; b u t gen erally the Genitive
des cri b es th e essential qualities th e A b lative t h e physical
1
1 9 III
M
2
6
1
N
N
A
R
2
2
N
2
1
00
H
G
1
4
4
4
4
3
(
[
7
5
5
B 2 24
74
.
,
.
,
,
,
.
.
,
,
.
.
,
.
:
,
.
a
.
,
.
.
.
,
.
the A b lative of description with th e A b la
I
a n of
r ea t cou r a e ; 2
tive of sp ecific ation
a
m
a
( )
g
g
( )
N ote th at in ( I ) th e adj ective
m a n g r ea t i n cou r ag e
directly qualifie s th e descri b ing n oun and the descriptive
A b lative is used in (2 ) th e adj e ctive directly qualifies the
noun de scri b ed and the A b lative o f sp ecification is used
i r t ut e
v i r s u m m u s v i r t ut e
v ir s u mma
For th e order and a greement o f an adj ective s ee 2
and 8
Fo r descrip tion b y ap positive and predicate noun s ee 7
75
C omp are
.
.
'
v
.
,
.
,
.
26
L
AT I N P RO SE C O M PO S I T I ON
RE M A RK S
79
I
.
qu e m
v
.
i di
U SE
T HE
ON
be
The relativ e cann ot
ma n I
tb c
'
,
sa
w
R E L A T IVE S
OE
omitted in Latin
:
homo
.
'
Wh il e th e relative a g r eés with its antecedent in
gender and nu m b er it agrees rather with a predicate
n oun in its o w n C lause than with an antecedent Of dif
fe r en t gend er o r n u m b er fro m th e predicate n oun : L i g e r
q u o d e s t G a l l i a e fl um en t b e L oi r e w b i cb i s a r i v er of Ga u l
h
T
e
antecedent
may
co
me
in
the
relative
clause
3
This regularly happ ens if the relative clause comes b efore
the n atural p ositio n of the antecedent : q u a m q u i s q u e f o r
t un a m h a b e t h ac f r u at u r l et ea cb enj oy w b a t for t u ne b e b u s
Th
e
relative
Often
stands
first
in
a
senten
ce
refer
4
rin g to s om ethin g that h as preceded
I n E nglish a
dem on strative pron oun is m ore c omm on with a con j u n c
tion o r c onj un ctiv e adv e rb : qu a e c u m i t a s i n t now s i nce
2
.
,
,
,
,
.
.
.
,
,
.
.
,
.
,
,
t b es e t b i ng s
a re so
.
L E S S O N XV
M ea n s
6 38 ,
1
(
5 49 ,
1
8:
232
8:
3
B
.
N
3 2 6, 1 :
.
:
2 46
3
& 5
8:
1 6 1, 2
.
N :
8: 4
.
:
24 6,
189 :
R
.
:
:
20 7 :
& b:
2 16 :
4 15
,
1 8:
24 7 :
2 48 , c
2 18 ,
t
.
wi h
N :
.
4 18
25 0
G
.
:
A
.
4 20 :
162
.
1 8 1, 1
8
8
:
7
33 7
:
46 7
1
.
.
38 8
:
M
14 7 , 1
.
Ag ency
a nd
—
1
H
6
:
43
[
3 3 4 33
,
468
163, c
:
8: 6
:
35 5
:
2 , at
:
:
4 76
45 3,
& a:
40 1
:
4 77
:
2,
N
.
2 0 1,
0
4
5
,
2
b
N
.
]
M ean s and agen cy are often expressed in E nglish
I n translating into
b y the u s e o f th e sa m e preposition
Latin the distinction b etween mean s and agen cy must b e
C learly drawn
80
.
.
,
.
M ean s o r instrument is exp ressed b y the A b lativ e
without a prep osition
I t is also used with v er b s and
81
.
.
I N T ROD U CT I ON
adj ectives
27
fullness and p lenty : g l a d i o s é d ef e n d eb t b e
H
6
w a s d efen d i ng b i ms elf by (m ea ns of ) b i s s w or d
4
[
7
II
II
M
2
1
2
A
2
8
1
G
R
8
2
1
0
4
4
4
4
)
7
5
47 7
(4
B
8
N
8
4 5
3
8 2 T h e a gent of a passive ver b is expressed b y the
A b l a tive With a or a b
This a gent is gen erally personal
and voluntary : a b D i o n i s i o e p u l s u s e s t b e w a s exp el l ed by
M 247
A 24 6 8 R G 46 1
D i ony s i u s
[ H 4 6 7 4 6 8 (4 1 5 I )
B 2 16
8 3 I f th e p erson is regarded as a m eans rather than
the real agent p e r with the Accusative is used ; C aesar
also uses th e A b lative without a p reposition : C e a r p e
l eg a t o c e t i o r f a c t s e t Ca es a r w a s i nfor m ed by (m ea ns of
)
M 4 7 3 A 246 a G
a m ba s s a d or s
8 4 With th e p assive p eriphr a stic conj ug a tion th e agent
is ex p ressed b y the D ative
I f t he ver b govern s also
an o b j ect D ative the agent is expressed b y th e A b lative
wit h the preposition when confusion would otherwi se a rise
n ob i
C t i l i n a i m d i ti p e r t i m es c e n d u s e s t w e b a v e n o w f o r
e been obl i ed t o fea r Ca t i l i n e ; a b i m p e r a t or e e 1
a l on
t
i
m
g
g
H
i
h
w
s
p
i
t
s
t
a
r
a
r
n
d
u
m
l
o
t
t
o
e
b
m
b
c
e
e
e
n
e
r
a
u
t
b
c
4
[
3
p
g
g
1
N
M
N
I
A
2
2
N
G
R
B
8
2
0
8
8
8
9
3
(3
3
7
w i th
&
of
’
a
,
~
.
.
,
0
2 1,
20 :
.
,
.
.
.
21
0
:
,
.
.
:
c,
,
.
.
.
:
.
.
x
:
.
.
,
.
,
.
2
,
.
:
.
.
.
.
.
.
,
a
u
r
s
s
s
r
,
.
.
2
,
.
,
.
.
.
.
,
,
.
’
s
a
a
,
''
,
1
:
.
,
.
.
.
.
.
.
1,
.
.
.
,
.
1
a
L E S S O N X VI
—
10
1
H
0
N
i
t
M a nner a nd Accomp a n men
4
4
3
3
[
73 ( 3
)
— 0
1
1
2
1
I
I
I
i
t
h
f
t
t
I
II
8
N
I
0
I
w
8
4
4 74
9
4
3
9
(3 3 3 5
M 14 8 — 1 5 1 4 4 2 4 5 A 1 4 8 2 4 8 8 R 2 4 8 & N 2 4 8 b 2 5 3 N G
—2 2 2 8
1
2
2
B
1
2
20
9
9
39
3 9 9 4 39
57
85
The m anner in w h ich a n a ct i on I S d on e m a y b e
ex p ressed b y th e A b l a tive with c u m
I f a li m iting a dj ec
tive or Genitive i s used c u m m a y b e o m itted : c u m c fi a
c a s tr a
m un i eb a n t u r t b c ca mp w a s bei ng ca r efu l ly (w i t b
,
,
:
.
: 2
.
:
:
:
:
:
.
.
:
:
,
:
.
.
oo no e
,
:
:
.
.
.
:
,
a
:
.
:
,
,
,
:
,
,
:
,
.
.
:
.
.
,
,
r
LAT I N P R O SE C O MP O S I T I ON
28
a ri
E
m
d
a
m
i
n
n
s
a
o
t
e
o
?
)
d
s
f
o
r
d
u
r
a
e
b
a
t
o
m
n
s
i
e
n
p
p
p
;
)
ifi
arti b u s
c et e r i s
i n l i b e m a n n er Ep a m i n on d a s s u rp a s s ed a l l
H
i n t b e o t b er a r t s
4 7 3 3 8 N ( 4 1 9 III w i t h f t n t e 3 8 N
[
M 2 4 5 A 248 8 R 2 5 3 N G 39 9 B 2 2 0 8 I
'
‘
ca r e
‘
,
.
86
:
.
.
.
:
:
,
.
.
,
.
.
.
,
.
oo
,
:
.
:
:
.
o
A cco mp an iment als o is exp res sed b y th e A b lative
.
with c u m C u m m ay b e o mitted und er the s am e c ondi
tion s as in 8 5 especially in military expressions V erb s
o f c ontention and S imilar word s take th e A b lativ e o f a c
c o m p a n i m e n t : s ec u m a u r u m h a b eb a t b e b a d t b e
ol d w i t b
g
b i m ; o m n i b u s s u i s s e c fi t u s e s t b e fo l l ow ed w i t b a l l b i s
C a t i l i n a c u m c i v i b u s c e r t av i t
m en
Ca t i l i ne f ot tg b t w i t b
H
1
2
1
N
1
I
II
I
8
8
b i s fel l ow ci t i z ens
4
4
4
4
73
[
7
( 9
M 244 A 248 w i th 8 N 2 4 8 b G 3 9 2 R B 2 2 2 8:
.
,
.
,
‘‘
,
,
-
.
.
:
a
,
.
:
.
:
,
.
.
,
,
:
,
.
.
.
.
:
,
,
.
M anner is frequently expressed b y an adv erb espe
ci a l ly when n ot qualified : c e l e r i t er p r Og r e s s u s e s t
be a d
0
0
H
0
0
6
v a n ced q u i cb ly (o r w i t b s w ift n es s )
3 4 3
3 7 3 9
[
—1 1
2
10
0
A
1
G
1
B
V
M
0
1
8
8
9
4
9
4
9
3
3
3
3
4
3
(
)
5
5
87
.
,
,
:
,
.
.
:
:
:
:
.
.
.
.
:
.
.
:
.
.
LE S S O N X V I I
—
m
r
i
n
Co p a s o
(
2 48 :
2
0
6
:
3
1 70 :
5
8
3 3, 3
0 :
:
0
4 3
2 84,
4 17 :
:
2
0
c
:
,
3
4 39
4
:
:
2
:
4 3
2
:
4 3
1
.
59
440 :
— 2
2
6
4
4 9
A
N
.
.
45 9 ,
—
89 9 3
.
b : 3 3 6 , c,
2
: 6 8—6 4
R
8
:
3
4
3
:
G
B
.
7
.
.
5
2 :
19 2 ,
:
8 6—8
.
4 79
:
1
47
1
1
:
3
:
4 44
.
33 2 ,
63 1,
1
4
3 ,
H
[
9
1—
77
0 3,
t
4 9 7 4 99
-
II
wi h
93
:
:
:
,
a
8: b :
2 9 1,
2 1 7 : 223 :
:
R
:
3 59
5
M 6 7—7 I = 2 3 9
19 3 :
2 :
.
16 ,
1,
:
24 7
—
d
a
:
8
2 9 6—30 3 :
24 1 :
2 40 :
6
39 8
28 3, 2, a
1,
in E nglish th e c omparative degre e is used in
c om paring t w o o b j ects th e superlative in co mparing mor e
than two [ H 49 8
M 6 7 4 2 6 A 19 2 19 3 G
88
.
AS
,
,
.
.
.
:
.
.
:
.
.
When b oth O b j ects com pared would n aturally b e in
th e N o m i n ative o r th e Accusative the adver b q u a m t ba n
m ay b e o m itted and t h e second O b j ect p ut in the A b lative
89
.
,
,
,
I NT ROD U C TI ON
29
case When q a m is used the O b j ects compare d must b e
in the sa m e c a se : C a e s r e r a t P o m p ei c) f él i c i o Ca es a r w a s
i l l a o at i on e q u a m
m or e s u cces sfu l t b a n P omp ey ; n on m i n
u
.
,
'
'
a
r,
us
r
L e u c t r i c a p fi g n a, n o
l es s by t b a t sp eecb t b a n by t b e ba t t l e
L eu ct r a
t
A
24 7
.
8:
H
[
.
a
G
.
.
47
29 6
.
wi h
1,
R
8:
.
I
1
39 8
:
1
4
( 7
8: 3
B
.
21
.
7
N
Wl th
1
,
M
.
.
2 39 ,
a
t
1
8:
With a m p l i u p l us m i n u s and l o n g i u s even when
q a m is omitted an ex p ressio n of m easure m ay b e used
without change in case : a m p l i u s d e c e m d i es O b s e i On e m
90
s
.
u
,
,
,
,
,
ss
t i n eb
s us
ant
,
f
1
1
H
,
4
4
4
( 7,
7
[
N
1,
.
mor e
or
t b a n t en d ay s t b ey
M
.
.
2 39 ,
3
A
.
24 7 , c
.
G
.
en d u r ed
.
2 9 6,
R
4
.
tbc
B
.
s
i eg e
.
2 17,
.
When adj ectives o r a d ver b s are c ompared b oth
generally h ave the form of th e c o m p arative degree ; b u t
m a g i s m or e W ith positive forms is also used :
u d ac i u
q u a m p r ud en t i s m or e bol d ly t b a n w i s ely ; m i s e r m g i
q u a m i m p o b u (a ma n ) u nfor t u na t e r a t b er t b a n w i cb ed
2
1
2
1
M
A
w
i
t
h
G
I
H
1
8
8
:
b
299
4
4
444
9
9
99
9
(
[
5
B 74 2 40
91
.
,
a
,
,
u
s
r
:
.
:
.
s
a
,
,
s
.
:
.
.
.
,
a
,
.
.
.
,
92
To
.
S how b y h ow much
o b j ect comp ared di ffers
degree (m easure ) of differ
on e
from t h e other the A b l a tive o f
enc e i s used : m l t O m a g i s h oc t i m e o m a cb
M 2 48
fea r t b i s [ H 4 7 1 10 4 7 9 (4 1 7 2
B 2 23
,
u
.
.
tbc
,
,
:
:
,
.
A
.
.
m or e d o
2
5
0
G
.
.
0
4 3
.
.
I f th e second o b j ect c om p ared i s expressed b y a
clause qu a m q u a m u t or q u a m q u i with th e S u bj un ctive is
used o m n i a f a c i eb a t q u a m (u t ) c o n i fi r at i On I s e a d i u n g e r e t b e
1
H
6
0
d i d ev ery t b i ng r a tb er t b a n j o i n t b e con sp i r a cy
9
[
5
5 3
2
b
6
2
1
II
M 3 8 3 3 A 3 20
N
G
R
B
6
8
:
283
33
33
3
3
93
.
‘
,
,
,
,
,
,
.
.
,
c :
,
:
,
c,
.
.
.
,
,
.
,
.
2 84 ,
2, a :
94
1
.
,
.
.
.
.
N ote also th e following peculiar uses
H
A l i s followed b
a t qu e
t
an
b
[
(
y
)
A
B
u
,
.
.
.
4 7 1, 6
:
5
1 6,
3
LAT I N P R O S E C O MP O S I T I O N
30
D i c t o,
etc us ed in stead of a clause [ H 4 7 1 8 (4 1 7 N
M 2 39 1 A 24 7 b G 3 9 8 N 1 B 2 1 7
S
u
m
s
m
u
m e d i u s e t c used to express what part o f an
3
o b j ect is m eant [ H 4 9 7 4 (440 2 N 1
A 19 3
M 42 3
G 9 R 2 B 24 1
u
a
m
with superla t ives den oting highest possi b le de
Q
4
gr ee [ H 1 5 9 2 ( 1 70 2
A 9 3 b C 30 3 8 R 1 B 2 40
2
.
,
.
.
.
,
.
.
,
,
2
1,
.
.
,
,
.
.
.
.
,
.
,
.
,
.
.
.
.
.
,
.
.
,
.
,
.
.
.
.
,
.
.
.
,
,
,
,
.
.
:
.
.
.
.
,
L E S S O N XV I I I
R el a t i ons
— 8
8
4 3 4 5
233 :
G
B
1 10 ,
.
.
2 40 :
II
(
1
49
:
of
0
3
1 :
)
2
t
:
w i h 1 8: 2
:
5, 5
3 79
:
24 2 :
:
33 7
:
2 1, 2, c
95
,
33 5
17, 1 :
2 29,
5
III
I—
24 7,
8
3 5
:
1
.
A
.
7
M
14 9 , a :
.
2
:
1 8 2 , 1—3 :
54
R
1
0
1
:
,
9
4
3
2 18 , 3 z 2 19 ,
0
9
3
:
— 1 :
3 4 9
2
4 5
12
:
4
:
N
8
6
3
:
18 1 :
:
0
8
3
:
1
4
:
.
.
I 8: 3
24 1 ,
,
Pl a ce
H
0
0
:
8
3
3
[
7
1
1
.
2
:
6
.
46 1
8:
5
1 :
57
:
47 6
19 6 :
19 9
2
:
411
:
462
:
:
tr
R 1
en i
8
,
5
6 1 1,
.
2 28
a :
e
1,
.
.
a —c
Place Whither is expressed b y t h e A ccusative with
a prep osition usually a d o r i n ; Place Whence by the
A b lative with a prep osition usually a b d e or e x ; Plac e
Where b y th e A b l ative with th e prep osition i n
.
,
,
,
,
,
,
.
u r b em
ad
b
r
e e x ut
y
( )
h
ti c r e m a n en t
i
n
u
r
b
e
a
d
b
e
b
e
r
o
m
t
c
i
t
t
y
f
y ;
1
2
1
0
I
H
1
6
1
8
8
8
I
i n i b e ci ty
4
4
4
9
4
4 3
(3
[
M 1 99 & N 4 2 3 3 I 2 40 A 2 5 4 2 5 8
G
B 1 8 2 2 8: 3 2 2 8 2 2 9 8
b e d ep a r t ed
s t i l l r em a i n
I
:
425
3 37
:
,
be
p er v en i t ,
I
8
3 5
a r r i v ed a t
,
,
.
.
:
:
:
:
,
c.
:
.
.
:
,
,
,
.
:
:
:
,
.
:
.
.
.
3 90
u
ex
'
:
:
ci t
tb e
to
With n am es o f Towns and with d o m u s and ri i s th e
p reposition i s omitted except when th e idea of neigh b or
hood is to b e expressed R om a e i i t b e d ep a r t ed fr om R om e ;
a d R am a m p o f e c t u s e s t
b e s et ou t f o r (t b e n ei gb bor b ood of )
—
2
i
h
&
II
II
w
t
8
0
1
I
2
6
H
8
8
8
R om e
4 4 9
4
(3
4 49
4
[
i
h
w
1
1
N
II
M
t
N
2
6
8
1
2
I
i
h
l
w
t
8
9
9
4 5
4
99
4
3
&
h
8
1
2
i
A
t
N
o
t
N
G
1
i
h
8
w
1 8
24
8
w
&
33 7
3
3
5
5
2 29 1 8
R 4 3 8 6 & R 2 39 1 8: R 1 B 1 8 2 1 8: 3 2 2 8 1
96
.
,
x
r
:
.
:
,
,
2 :
:
,
1
.
,
:
:
.
:
.
2
:
2
,
.
a
.
: 2
:
,
,
.
1,
.
,
1,
:
,
:
,
.
2 :
.
.
1
,
,
:
1
:
,
:
.
,
,
a —c :
1
,
,
2,
,
2
:
,
.
.
.
:
I N TR O D U CT I O N
1
3
express Place Where with na m es of towns o f t h e
first or second declens i on and with d o m u s an d r fis a special
form th e Locative is used
The L o c a t i v e ends in the first declension S ingular in e ;
in the seco nd declension S ingular in i ;in the plural o f b oth
these declension s in i s
97
TO
.
,
,
.
,
,
i
,
a
,
‘
.
Z
a
mas
Z
a
H a n ni b al
ma
A t h en i s
.
484,
:
III )
4 28 ,
2 28 , 1, a
M
.
)
1
at
t N
wi h
2,
29, 2 :
.
24 2
t
wi h
2 3 2,
:
v
1
t,
es
i v éb
‘
H
8
4
3
[
tu s
ic
v
.
T h es e u s ,
1
A
.
.
H a n n i ba l w a s
25
8,
Tb es eu s l i v ed
II
49 1 ,
2 :
a
.
411
B
.
2 1, 2 , c
.
a
t
t A t b en s
t
G
.
a
w i h 3,
8: 3
'
c, 2
co nq u er ed
I)
)
2
.
)
:
8:
M any verb al ideas tak e a n A b lative o f Plac e Where
without a prep osition E xamples o f such are n i t o r
f d o c o n t e n t u s and f r ét u s : i n s i d i i s n I s u s e s t b e r el i ed up on
1
II
M 24 7 N I A
H
6
2
I
a n a m bu s ca d e
47
3 (4 5
[
1
1
2
1
2
G
R
B
2 4 b 1
2
0
1
6
8
9
4
3
]
5
98
,
.
,
.
''
i
,
,
,
,
,
.
.
,
.
.
,
,
,
.
.
,
.
:
.
,
a
,
of
I
6 1 1,
:
R
,
.
.
,
.
.
.
the adver b s
G 1 10 II
by
.
.
.
.
.
Thes e relations are often expressed
p lace [ H 30 7 2—5 ( 30 5 I—III ) M 1 5 1 A
99
,
.
1 49 , a
.
.
,
,
.
LES SO N X I X
R el a t i ons
3
1
:
5
G
.
48 6 4 8 9 ,
-
1 :
19 7 :
II
1 10 ,
20 3 ,
2:
,
1 :
6 38 ,
243 :
2 :
223 :
Ti me
of
1,
249 :
6
33
:
(
2
39 3
2 2 7, 2 , a
)
:
—
:
H
0
8
,
3
[
.
0
3 5
55
B y P hr a s e
,
IV
,
1
.
3 94
2 30 :
:
3 79
A
.
40 3
23 1 :
o:
14 9 ,
N
33 7
,
.
4
25
:
5
:
a
0
4 9 :
4 17
:
:
I
,
:
1
0
:
4
25
6
2
:
66 5
:
59
440 ,
M
—
2
4 9 4 3 1. 1 :
’
,
3 10
1 :
a —d :
,
6 70
.
B
.
29 2
.
18 1
3 5 7,
2, a :
The Ti m e When th e action occurred is expressed b y
the A b l a tive usually with so m e modifier The pre p osition
i n is regularly used with num erals in m arking the period
o f life and when t h e Time Within Which i s emphas iz e d :
100
.
,
.
,
,
LAT I N P RO SE CO MP O S I T I ON
2
3
t em p o r e
h Oc
co ns u l
i
n
;
c on s u l
te
noc
c r e at u s
m ag n a e
c Op
f
or ces b a d a r r i v ed
g
M 243 A 2 5 6 8
G 39 3 8 R
r ea
t
.
: a
.
.
:
.
tb i s t i m e b e w a s
t, at
i ae p
er v
5
.
3 9 4,
:
B
.
8:
1
.
t
n ig
t
2
i
h
w
,
4
9
(
2
wi h
2 30 ,
el ect ed
i n tb c
én er a n t ,
H
6
8
:
4
[
48 7 , w i th
.
.
es
1
bi
8:
1— 3 :
101
Tim e D uring Whic h is expressed by the Ac cusa
tive so metim es intensified b y th e use o f p e r t b r oug b : i l l u d
t e m p u s C a e s a r i n G a l l i a e r a t d u r i ng t b a t t i m e Ca es a r w a s i n
1
H
1
8
M
A 2 5 6 w i th & o
1
Ga u l
9 7 243 8 N
4 7
[
( 3 79
G 33 6 B 1 8 1 1 8
which
C om p are th e descriptive Gen itive o f m easure
is Often used to express measure o r duration o f tim e
2
21
2
o
V
M
A
G
R
B
6
6
2
0
2
0
H
9
3
4
4
(
3
3 3
)
3
5
5
[
.
,
,
,
:
:
.
.
.
a
,
.
:
,
.
.
.
:
.
.
.
,
,
.
.
.
.
,
.
.
.
.
,
.
.
,
Tim e B efore or After an action h as eith er th e A b l a
tive of degree o f di fferenc e o r the A ccusative of extent
m u l t I s a n t e d i eb u s o r m u l t Os d i es a n t e m a ny d ay s befo r e
d
2
2
2
N
f
t
t
M
A
1
2
2
0
8
8
8
8
H
4
43
9
479 3 4
(4 3
59
[
G 40 3 N 4 B 2 2 3 3 5 7
102
.
''
.
,
:
,
.
,
.
.
.
:
,
,
:
.
oo no e
:
:
.
.
.
,
.
.
,
Th e preceding relation s of tim e are Often ex
pressed b y adverb s : [ H 308 8 1 ( 30 5 IV 8 N 2
M 15 1 A
G 1 10 II 2 B
14 9 o
Th e A b lative ab s ol ute (21 24) is Often used instead
2
d
1
1
2
2
1
8
M
A
H
8
o f a temp oral clause
4 9
(4 3
55
55
[
B 22 7 2
1
G 4O9 4 10 6 6 5
1
1
6
2
8
8
8
sp
ecial
expre
ssions
time
H
s
e
f
e
o
F
r
o
4
4
7
3
0
2
2
1
2
8
M
A
G
B
2
2
2
8
8
3
3
3
394
43
59
4
(4 9
103
1
.
.
:
.
.
,
.
,
,
:
,
.
.
.
,
.
.
.
-
.
.
:
:
.
.
.
:
.
.
.
,
,
.
.
,
.
,
.
,
.
,
,
,
.
.
,
.
a —c
.
.
.
.
,
:
,
:
:
,
:
,
L E S S O N XX
R el a t i ons
5
06
.
A
.
2
5 9,
of T i me
e :
376
.
—
Da t es
G App
.
en d i x ,
—
6
H
4
75
[
75
R
C al e n d a
oman
r
M
1
6
( 4
.
.
.
B
.
— :
1
1
37 ,
7
.
49 8
3 72
]
The Rom an year originally b egan in M arch T he
s
M
t
i
n
i
s
a
r
F
b
u
a
u
e
i
a
a
n
u
I
am
s
th
e
m
onths
were
r
r
n
e of
104
.
.
r
us ,
,
,
LAT I N P RO SE C O MP O S IT I ON
34
n
N
ote
that
th
e
day
efore
of
th
ese
points
b
o
e
of
3
reckoning was always p r i d i e (n ever s e c u n d u s ) : p i d i é N On as
.
r
I fi l i as , t b e s i x t b o
4
For
.
I I I, 3
ly
f j
p ecu li arities
u
M 501
2
II
6
I
,
,
( 4
.
.
of
A
.
con s t r
.
25
9
e
,
.
p
ct i o n
G
.
in dates see H 7 5 4
nd i
B 37 1 6
P
4
.
,
App e
x,
ar
.
.
.
,
,
.
LESSO N XX I
R el a t i on s
(5
M
18
289 :
of
Ti m
—
.
B y Cl a u s e
—
e
34 3 3 5 4
A
.
[H
.
— 2
2
2
3
3
.
5
:
2
3 8
32 7 :
.
66 0 —66 5
G
.
6 8 3,
:
B
—
8
9
55
5 5
.
2
.
.
8:
N
28
7
.
29 1
I n temporal clauses th e I n dicativ e is generally used
to defin e th e tim e o f th e m ain clause ; th e S u b j unctive t o
107
.
descri b e th e tim e b y giving som e c ircumstan ce B ut th e
construction used with t he different temp oral c onj unctions
in th e text sh ould b e c arefully noted
.
.
an d s i m u l a t q u e are
regularly followed b y th e Perfect I n dicative for these tem
poral c onj unction s m ake th e tim e definite : C a t i l i n a p o s t
q u a m s e c o m p r e s u m c og n ov i t e x u r b e e x i i t aft er Ca t i l i n e
H
6
0
2
M
b n ew b i m s elf t o be foi l ed b e l eft t b c ci ty
[
1
2
A
G
6
B
8
3 4
7
3 43
5
108
P
.
os
t qu am ,
m p ri m u m ,
cu
ub
i,
u
t,
,
s
,
,
.
,
2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
,
With c u m temp oral referring to p ast time th e
I mp erfect o r Plup erfect S u b j unctive is generally used
T o denote a definite p ast time th e Perfect I ndicative m ay
I n referring to present or future tim e c u m is
b e used
followed b y th e I n dicative : c u m i 111 e d éf e n d e e n t h o s t es
t
e
e
e
i
t
s
l
s
n
r
n
i
t
b
e
w
r
e
d
f
n
d
n
b
e
m
e
v
e
l
l
s
n
v
e
e
w
b
e
fi
r
c
o
e
p
y
g
109
,
.
.
,
.
s
u
tb e
my
en e
cum
i b o,
,
r
,
,
m bl ed i n g r ea t er n u m ber s ; c u m v en e r i t , V ob i s
w b en b e co m es (s b a l l b a v e com e) I w i l l g o w i t b
asse
I NT ROD U CT I ON
y
ou
cu
;
m
su
d
C a p p a d o ci a
a
en
tir
e
G
.
.
es
H
[
.
5 79
ta
0
8
5
:
.
:
ta
t ad i
8
5 5
n
g
t
,
1,
t u en d
E u m en i
,
ba d
ty
M
A & B
a
been i n
Cappa d oci a w a s g i v en
wi h 1
,
.
.
i cca e
s ov er ei
tb e
f
I 8: II
B 288
60 0 ,
er d
er d i cca s ,
P
o
P
e s s et
w b en
t,
cb a rg e
t r u s t ed t o t b e
t o E u m en es
r
mma
35
.
A
—
8
4
4
4
3
3
.
.
2
3
5
,
:
and p r i s q m h ave the same constru e
er o q u m e q u i t at u s n o s t e r p r
tions as c u m temporal : p r i
i ce
nt
bu t befor e ou r ca v a l ry a r r i v ed
v e n i r e t p e d i t és h o s t e
H
6
0
M 3 49
t b c i nfa n t ry b a d d efea t ed t b e en emy
[
5
2
A
2
G
B
1
8
9
5 74 5 7 7
3 7
35
110
A
.
n t eq u a m
ua
u
a
us v
’
ra
s v
,
e
,
,
.
: a
.
:
.
.
.
.
.
.
1 :
.
and q u o a d meaning a s l ong a s take
the I ndicative ; meaning u n t i l th ey take the S u b j unctive
to denote purp ose and futurity b u t the I ndicative to
denote an actu a l fact : d u m h a e c g e r u n t r r el i q i d i s c e s s e
run t
w bi l e t b es e t b i ng s w er e g o i ng on t b c r es t d ep a r t ed ;
d m e q u i t es r e e t e e n t
e x s p e c t ab n t
i b ey w er e w a i t i ng
6
0
6
0
1
H
M
u n t i l t b e i r ca v a l r
s b o u l d r et u r n
4
3
[
y
—
—I II w i t h
2
A
8
G
6
1
2
B
&
3 49 3 5
35 4
3
5 9 57
57
111
D u m , d on e c ,
.
,
,
,
,
‘
u
u
,
,
,
u
a
v
r
r
ur
.
.
2
a
.
:
.
:
:
.
.
:
,
,
,
.
.
.
LESSON XX I I
Use
19 8 :
2 90
.
a nd
—
66
4
4 73
G
.
:
2 2 2— 2
S equ ence
of
49 1
M
5
2 :
5
0 9—5 1 9
.
.
—
Tens es
— 12
0
3 3 3
B
.
2
57
—26
H
[
1 9 6—1 9 8 :
.
:
— 1
1
3 4 3 7
9
]
.
A
.
27
5
26
6—2 8 1
55
-
:
6
(
19 7
2 8 3— 2 8 8
112
I n Latin t h e u s e of tenses is more exact than in
E nglish
Thus the E nglis h Prese n t or Futur e strictly
c onsidered S hould Often b e a Future or Future Perfect
C a refully deter m ine th e exact ti m e rel a tio n : s i h u i c r e m e
ai u m a t t u l er i s
t é r e m un e r ab o r i f y ou br i ng (s b a l l b a ve
.
.
,
.
,
,
;
LAT I N P R O SE CO M P O S I T I ON
6
3
br oug b t , i
n ot until you h ave com pleted the action ) s om e
0
H
2
0
cu r e f o r t b i s I w i l l r ep ay y ou
[
54
(4 7 w i t h 1 2 4 7 3 8
M 3 1 1 A 2 7 8 8 b 2 8 1 & R G 2 4 2 & R I 2 44 w i th R 1 8 2
B 2 5 7 1 8 2 2 6 2 2 64 ]
.
e
.
,
.
:
,
113
:
.
.
.
1,
:
:
:
,
:
:
:
,
.
.
.
a
,
.
.
,
:
.
.
.
When th e action o f the dep endent clause is either
in th e s am e or in som e future tim e relative to that o f th e
princip al ver b th e t ens e o f th e d ependent C lause is one
i e Present I mp erfect; o r Future
o f c ontinued action
Wh en th e dep endent action precedes th at o f th e princip al
th e dep endent ver b has a tense o f c omp leted action i e
Perfect Pluperfect or Future Perfec t : i l l e fi n u s e s t q i h oe
f a c e r e p o s s i t b e i s tb e on ly on e w b o ca n d o t b i s ; i l l e fi n u s
.
,
.
,
.
,
.
,
.
,
.
'
,
u
,
,
es
t q u i h oe f eo e r i t ,
114
1
.
.
P r i ma ry
b e i s tb e
on ly
on e
w b o d i d d o tb i s
The ten ses are divided into
tw o
.
classes
Present Future an d Future Perfect I ndica
tive an d Present and Perfect S u b j unctive
S econ d a ry : I mperfect Perfect an d Plup erfe ct I ndic a
H
1
tive and I mp erfect an d Pluperfec t S u b j un ctive
98
[
M 304 A 2 8 5 G 2 2 5 B 2 5 8 2 6 7
:
,
,
,
.
,
,
,
.
2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
:
.
,
O n this division dep ends th e rule for th e sequen ce
of
tenses which h owever affects only dependent su b j un ctive
c lauses
,
,
,
.
RU L E
A ny prim ary ten se in th e principal C laus e is
followe d b y o n e o f the p rimary ten ses in th e S u b j unctive
c lause ; any secondary ten se in th e principal clause b y
H
o n e o f th e S econ dary tenses of th e S u b j un ctive
[
54
— 1
6
B
B
6
0
A
G
0
1
M
1
2
2
8
6
8
5 44 5 5 (4 9
3 4 3 7
5 9 5 9
7
.
,
:
26
.
.
.
:
—
.
.
1
.
2
.
.
.
2
,
7,
f
o
Th
e
p
oints
O
serve
are
whether
th
e
ten
se
t
1
o
b
3
( )
the principal ver b i s p rim ary o r sec ondary ; ( 2 ) whether
.
I NT R O D U CT I O N
37
the action of the dependent ver b is still continuing o r is
completed relative to the ti m e o f the principal ver b
Then u s e the tense that answers botb de m an ds [ H 5 4 5
M 3 14 A 8 6 R G 5 10 5 1 1 B 2 5 7 1 2 6 7
.
.
.
.
2
.
.
.
:
.
.
.
:
,
,
R ELATI VE T I M E
O F A C TI O N
I n com p l et e
P r i ma ry
C o m p l et e
S econ d a ry
L E S S O N XX I I I
Ca u s e
63 8 ,
2
54
d,
:
2 :
626
2 :
68 3,
1 :
:
25
5
2,
35 5 35 8
2
3 0, e :
6 33
B
33 7 ,
Z
’
3 26
6
4 5
2 :
G
.
2 2 6, 2 :
2 19 :
8
8
5
5 7
:
:
:
:
,
:
.
,
.
:
40 8 :
d
)
39 7
2 2 7, 2 ,
I 8 II 5 9 2
0
I
V
M
2 8
)
54
—
0
1
A
1
d
6
47
5
f
8
5 9,
:
1
7 8: 8
,
3 73
.
:
16 :
5
2
8
3 ,
:
32 1 :
19 8 , 1 :
.
48 1
:
.
29 2 :
.
4 75
,
—
2 :
,
[ H 3 16 7 :
N (4 1 6 :
.
.
1
.
.
8
9
5
:
,
2 38 , 2
1 :
,
24
:
5 99
:
5
:
25
5,
—
8
2
:
11
b
:
8
6
,
,
4
3
9
5
5
57
5
2 8 3, 3 & a : 2 8
: 286 : 299,
5
:
f]
expressed b y a noun takes usually the A b
lative sometimes with a pre p osition
With d i g n s an
A b l a tive o f cause wit h out a pre p osition i s regularly used :
q u a ( d é ) r e s e n a t u s c o n o c at s e t beca u s e of t bi s t b i ng t b c
115
C ause
.
‘
,
v
s en a t e
was
w or t by
o
2
54
.
A
u
.
.
ca
ll ed
245
a
G
.
.
s
t og et b er ;
b i s b on er s
f
u
H
475
[
.
.
N
39 7 ,
.
2 :
,
h o n or i b
:
40 8 8:
48 1
N
.
,
3
I
1
6
8:
4
(
.
B
.
d i gn u s
us
:
2 19 :
es
t
,
M
2
1
,
4
be is
.
238 , 2
2 2 6,
is often ex p ressed b y th e Accusative with
p r o p t e r o r o b ; a lso b y c a u s e a n d g r a t i a f o r t b e s a b e of with
a
s
u a lifying G e n itive : p r o p t e r a r m o c c i
e t
b
e was
q
b i l l ed f o r b i s g o l d
e
em p l i g r at i a
or tbc s a be o
l
s
i
i
l
u
t
r
t
a
o
n
f
f
I
f
t
t
M
I
N
2
6
8
1
H
8
o r ex a mp l e
4
4
4
)
[
(
75
5
B 98
A 45 b 8
G 373 R 4 8 N
116
.
C ause
,
,
'
u
u
su
s
,
‘
x
.
.
.
2
,
:
c
.
.
,
1
,
.
:
0
,
,
,
.
2
:
oo no e
.
1
.
,
21
,
:
2
,
.
.
38
LA
117
T I N P RO SE C O M PO SIT I O N
I n c au sal cl a uses wh en introduced b y c u m or
th e S u b j unctive is regularly used : q u a e c u m i t a s i n t
.
''
u
I
q
,
,
p r6
,
i am u r , s i n ce t b es e t b i n s a r e s o,
g
r
d
e
g
II
B
:
.
M
2 :
8
9
9
5
5
2 8 3 , 3 8: a :
28
5
35 5
.
2
8
3 ,
:
2
A
.
.
2 8 6,
:
l et
d v a n ce
us a
2
6
3
2
0
e
:
,
3
G
.
[ H 5 89
.
6
8
8
:
5
.
R
.
.
,
1 :
63 3
I n causal C lauses introduced b y q u o d q u i a or
q u o n i a m th e I ndicative is used B ut if th e reason is q uote d
o r stated dou b tfully th e S u b j un ctive must b e used : q u o d
118
.
,
,
,
.
,
v
en i s t i s ,
y
ou
ob i s
v
r
u
e
b
é
q
m th e, beca u s e y ou b a v e
cu
at u r
qu i a
v ec t i
s ua
co
m e, I w i l l g o w i t b
m ai d r a
a
l
i
a
g
e s s en t
be w a s
,
'
co
mp l a i n i ng beca u s e (a s
I 8: I I
H
8
8
,
[
5
.
h e claimed ) b i s t a x es w er e t oo b ea vy
M 3 5 7 3 5 8 A 3 2 1 G 5 3 9—5 4 1 B 2 8 6
:
.
.
.
.
N OTE
For differen ce s in the forc e
M 4 65
tio n s s e e H 3 1 6 7 ( 3 1 1 7 5 40 IV
d —j : G 5 3 8 n t
2
4
5
of
.
.
,
o es :
,
.
:
,
,
.
,
,
.
.
,
thes e
8
: 8
7
,
.
j
A
con u n c
4 70 ,
:
.
1
.
.
1
6
5 ,
.
L E S S O N XX I V
P u r p os e
622
6 26
:
—
62 7,
:
2 14
8:
2 94,
4 30 :
:
N
t
.
4
298,
:
2
43
&
3 38 ,
7,
:
289,
:
628
2 :
II 8 N
5 33 ,
1,
B y P h r a se
R
&
.
29 1 :
c:
00
:
3
R :
43 5
1, c
8:
.
)
5
:
3
2
I N
,
.
8:
2
1
3 8
30 2 :
,
8: 3
42,
,
N
.
3 39
:
3
en d
,
G
.
.
5 44 ,
:
.
6
35
B
:
435
:
.
M
A
.
.
tr
60 8
1 :
1,
.
2 34
2 33 :
20 6
8: b
2
2
8
R
,
4
.
.
,
2 :
35 9 & R 3 :
1 9 1 en i e : 1 9 2 ,
w i h a 8: a ]
.
t
:
N
2
33
0
1
:
3
297 :
N
3 90 8:
,
.
,
t
—
i
h
1
w
433,
3
:
II 1
III N 2
8
( 3 4,
2 96 :
5 46
:
.
.
6 3 2— 6 3 4
:
1 :
.
2
H
4
I
5, 3
3 26,
2 :
N
:
.
337,
.
To express purp ose b y a n oun th e Accusative with
esp ecially with ideas of fit n ess and usefulness :
a d is used
t b i ng ( p u r
h a nc
ad
e m C i c e r on i m ag n o fi s u I e r a t f or t b i s
p os e) b e w a s of g r ea t s er v i ce t o Ci cer o [ H 4 3 5 1 ( 39 1 II I
N 4 A 34 8 b G 3 5 9 R 3 B 19 2 2 N ]
M 2 14
120 Th e D ative o f purp ose is a lso used fre q uently with
a D ative o f th e p erson interested ( D ative o f reference )
This is most co m m on with d a r e d fi c e r e e s s e h a b er e an d
119
,
.
,
''
r
,
.
.
.
.
2
:
.
.
.
,
.
.
,
,
.
.
,
,
,
.
,
.
.
,
,
,
,
I NT R OD U C TI ON
ve
rt e r e :
p
t en t b l eg i on
(f
as
l e g i On e m
d ec i m a m
idio
r a es
or
)
a
g
ua rd
39
h a b éb
H
8
:
4
33
[
2
.
.
(
390 ,
at
N
b e b a d tb e
,
M
.
.
20 6
.
G 3 5 6 R 2 8: 3 B 19 1 w i th 1 8:
121 To express purp os e in b rief ph rase the Gerundive
or
o r the Gerund m ay b e used in th e Accusative with a d
in the Genitive preceding c a u s a o r g r a t i a
A
2 33
.
,
.
.
,
.
.
.
,
,
.
,
,
.
The Gerundive is a p assive participle and agrees
with the noun governed b y a d o r c a u s a
The Gerund b eing a verb al noun is governed by
2
the a d or c a a
1
,
.
.
.
,
,
us
t u dru m
t
cdns
r ep r i
ili a
c On s
ua
i li d ru m
r ep r i
m e n d Or u m
m en d i
i
caus
a p r o ffi g ér u n t ,
l
p
a ns
f
I n the first ex a mple c on s i l i or u m is t h e G enitive with c a u s e
and r ep r i m e n d or u m a grees with c on s i l i or u m I n the second
c on s i l i a is the Accusative O b j ect o f r e p r i m e n d i
wh ic h is t h e
Genitive with c a u s a Avoid th e Acc usative with Gerun d
H
2
6
2
2
after a d
6
6
8
8
I
N
2
III
N
M
1
2
2
8
4
[
9 3
9
(5
5
29 7
A 29 8 R 8
G 4 2 8 R 2 43 2 8 R B 338 1 ) 3
296
300
t b ey
l
d
e
f
tb c
or
t b w a r t i ng y
p u rp os e of
ou r
.
,
,
,
.
,
,
.
:
339
,
,
.
.
1, 2
:
.
.
4
-
:
.
:
,
c:
.
,
.
.
,
,
.
:
:
.
c
,
,
.
:
,
.
.
1
The Gerundiv e is used in agreement with the
O b j ect o f m any ver b s to denote the purpose : n av es r e fic i
2
N
H
6
2
2
e n d as c fi r a i t
b e b a d t b e s b ip s r epa i r ed
44
[
(5
A 2 9 4 d G 4 30 B 3 3 7 7
M 95
123 The S up in e in u m with an o b j ect if necessary i s
used to ex p ress pur p ose only with verb s o f motion : l fi d os
122
.
v
.
2
,
2
,
,
.
.
.
.
.
.
,
,
.
.
,
.
,
-
.
vis u
N
,
,
t b c g a m es
G 4 3 5 , w i th
1 8: 2
m i er u n t , t b ey w en t t o
s ee
H
2
6
3 ,
E
.
.
1 :
6
4
(5
63 3
A 30 2
b]
N
B 340 1 w i th
N ever express p ur p ose in L a tin b y t h e In fin i
Ca u ti on
tive a lthough this construction i s very c o m m o n ly used in
0
H
6
8
E n glis h
M 33 2 A 3 1 8 G 5 46 N 3 en d
( 5 3 3 II 8: N
[
B 3 26 N ]
8:
M 30 1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
,
.
.
a
,
.
.
,
.
.
,
.
.
,
.
.
.
.
.
.
,
.
,
.
LAT I N P RO SE C O MP O S IT I ON
0
4
L E S S O N XX V
—B
P u r p os e
2
:
8
3
3 30 :
6 30
B
.
3 33 336
:
38 2
3
A
.
8
5 9
:
.
.
—
33 1 :
282 :
.
l
u
e
C
a
s
y
— 68
6
H
[
5 4 5
180 , e :
,
5
:
(49 7
0
9
3 17 :
1
33
G
.
M
:
.
—
5 44 5 5 0
.
2 94
To express purp o se b y a clau se th e S u b j un ctive is
used with u t if affirmative with n é if n egative : u t C a t i l i n a
i n ex s i l i u m e x i r e t
C i c e r c) Om n i
f ec i t Ci cer o m a d e ev ery
H
6
8
II
M
efior t t b a t Ca t i l i n e s b o u l d g o i n t o ex i l e
4
9
[
5
( 7
)
2
I
B
2
8
2
A
1
1
G
8
8
3
3 7
3
5 45
125
The relative q u i wit h the S u b j unctive may b e u sed
wh en th e antecedent o f q u i is n ot that person who se p ur
p o se is expressed Q u o (originally an A b lative o f degree )
is u sed in a purpo se C lau se w hich c ontains a c om parative
l eg a t os m i t t i t q u i c u m C a e s a r e c o n l o q u a n t u r b e s en d s a m
ba s s a d or s t o confer w i t b Ca es a r q u o f a c i l i u s c a u s a m b e l l a n d i
124
.
,
,
'
a
,
,
’
.
.
.
.
.
:
,
.
,
.
.
,
.
.
.
,
,
'
.
,
r ep e r i r e n t
,
C a r t b ag i n i én s es i n H i s p an i a m H a m i l c a r e m m i s er u n t ,
Ca r tb ag i n i a n s
tb e
m or e
H a m i l ca r
s en t
to
Sp a i n t b a t t b ey m ig b t
p r et ex t f or ma b i ng
M 33 1 38 2 8 3 A 3 1 7
i ly
nd a
fi
0
2
0
B
I
II
2
b
G
6
8
8
4
3
5 9 ( 97
5 45
2 82 I
8 2 w i th
]
126 A ver b who se action lo oks toward th e future take s
as i t s o b j ect a p urpos e C lause used su b stantively S ee the
grammar for lists o f such verb s
I I u b e d or d er an d v e t o for bi d take th e I nfin itive
V erb s of wish ing take either the I n finitive or the
S u b j unctive
b
u
S
V
er
s
hindering
in
the
a
firmative
h
ave
the
b
f
f
o
3
j u n ctive with q u om i n u s
A few ver b s as p r o h i b e o have
the I nfinitive
I m p e r a v i t n é q u i s e x c a s t r i s d i s c é d e r e t b e or d er ed t b a t n o
on e s b ou l d l ea v e t b e ca mp ; i u s s i t e d s v i c u m i n c e n d e r e b e
ea s
:
,
,
,
a
.
,
:
a
:
:
.
.
wa r
:
,
.
.
H
[
6
8
,
7
5
.
,
.
8
5 9
:
:
.
.
.
.
.
.
,
,
,
.
,
.
.
.
,
,
.
,
,
.
L
2
4
ool i s b
f
M
B
bel i ev e tb es e t b i ng s
to
as
t
3 8 2, wi h
.
28 2,
.
3
13 1
383
2 8 3 , 1—
A
.
2 8 4, 2
5
:
AT I N P R O SE C O M P O S I T I ON
3 19 , 2
.
8:
a
.
N
.
H
[
20
3
:
G
.
5
.
55
.
1 —7
1
9 ,
R
2,
.
II )
8:
63 1
2 :
1
-
.
3
.
]
with a S u b j unctiv e o f result is used after
n egative expression s of hindran ce dou b t etc
n On e s t
d u b i u m q u I n C i c e r o m ax i m u s or a t o r f u e
ri t t b er e i s n o d ou bt
H
II
1
0
1
8
t b a t Ci cer o w a s a v ery g r ea t or a t or
4
9
[
59
5 5
(5
t
II 2 5 0 4 5 0 5 I I) M 34 1 3 A 3 19
G 5 5 4—5 5 6 B 2 8 4 3
Q ui n
.
,
,
''
,
.
.
:
:
,
29 5
,
3
,
.
.
.
,
.
,
a
c
:
,
:
.
.
.
,
,
.
a
,
M any verb s (see the grammar for lists ) take a clause
o f result as the su b j ect if th e m ain ver b is impersonal ;
as th e o b j ect if th e clause is b oth the o b j ect and the result
o f th e action o f the main ver b : a c c i d i t u t l o c u s i n i q u u s
es et
e f f ec i t
i t b app en ed t b a t t b e p os i t i on w a s u nfa v or a bl e
u t e a e l e p h a n t u s Or n a t u s i r e p o s s e t
b e m a d e i t p os s i bl e f or
1
H
a n el ep b a n t fu l ly eq u i pp ed
t o g o t b i s w ay
[
57
M 34 1 1 8 2 A 3 3 2 G 5 5 3 B
132
.
,
,
s
,
,
,
:
,
.
13 3
,
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
I n result clauses if the actio n is completed th e Per
.
,
,
fe et S ub j unctive i s generally used even after the secondary
B 2 68
G 5 13
tenses [ H 5 5 0 (49 5 VI) M 3 6 2 A 2 8 7
.
.
,
.
1
.
.
,
,
.
c
.
.
.
,
.
L E S S O N XX V I I
S i mpl e S ta t emen t
Cond i t i on s
5 74
:
3 74
:
1
1
3
.
(
5 75
47
G
13 4
.
t i on a l
0,
.
4
3
1
1
3 ,
.
A
.
—
1
8
9
9
5
5
:
:
5
0 7,
15
5
,
5 93
z
:
,
N
I
0
3 5
e z
I
4
9
5
,
:
7
.
,
a
H
1
6
3 ,3
[
.
.
M
:
8: b, I
5 95
.
B
.
:
6
0
3
.
:
0
6
3
0
1
:
3
:
0
3 7,
36 1
1,
:
5
:
6
3 3
2
:
7
t
wi h
:
C1
1
5 73
,
371
.
:
372
10
3
0
2
:
3
A c ondition al sentence h a s two clauses the condi
C lause or protasis an d th e conclusion or apodosis
,
,
.
Two p oints m ust b e O b served fro m the E nglish
s enten ce b efore any attempt to write it in L a tin i s made :
13 5
.
I NT ROD U CTI O N
43
the
Tim
e
to
which
the
condition
refers
present
p
ast
( )
or future ; (2 ) the Attitude of the S peaker or writer t o the
act
does h e si m p ly state th e c ondition without any i m p li
cation o f its truth or does he im p ly that the sup p osition
?
[f b e i s
is only po ssi b le (n ot pro b ab le ) o r is even untrue
b er e i t i s w el l : time pres ent ; thought expressed S imple
i
l
l
[
b
e
w
e r e b er e
t
w
o
u
d
b
e
w
e
l
i
e
S
imply
stated
f
(
)
time present ; th ought contrary t o fact
1
,
,
,
,
.
,
,
.
,
.
.
,
,
Wh atever the time referred t o if th e writer S imply
states the condition without implying its truth o r falsity
the conditio n al C l a use h a s th e I n dicative the c onclusion
also the I ndicative unless other demands Of the sentenc e
require a di fferent form of th e ver b e g the I mperative
13 6
.
,
,
,
.
,
T
I ME
TE
SS
B
EP
rF
X
P res en t
P
I
D
K
S imp l e
C O N DITI O N
i t P res
SI w h
''
In d
.
.
C O N C LU S I O N
P res
.
.
In d
Si
.
.
EX
AM P LE
pa
t er
a
b
en e
es
f
a t b er
is
d es
t
,
if
t,
b er e,
i t i s w el l
it P a s t
P a s t t en s e
5 1 w h
”
t ens e
,
In d
In d
.
SI pa
''
b
.
f
t er
en e
a t b er
a
e
de
ra t
,
r a t if
,
w a s b er e,
i t w a s w el l
F u tu re
S impl e
$ 1 w h Fu t
m
v i vid ,
r
o
e
(
or
s ba
ll
or
w i ll )
“
it
form
F u t P erf
.
In d
S o me Fu t
.
.
.
Si pa
t er
a
d
er i
b
en e
er i
t,
f
a t b er
is
(
t,
if
s ba
ll
be) b er e, i t w i ll
.
be w el l
Th e tens e of th e ver b in th e c ondition a l clause
must b e carefull y c on sidered for an E nglish Presen t
Often c onc e a ls a re a l Future or even a Future Perfect
I n Latin the exact ti m e relation must appear ; f or exam
ples s ee 112
13 7
.
,
.
-
,
.
AT I N P R O SE C O MP O S I T I ON
L
44
L E S S O N X XV I I I
— P os s i b l e a n d Con t r a r
—
F
t
c
o
a
t
y
Cond i t i ons
.
11 8: 111 : 5 7 6—5 8 4 ( 5 0 7 ,
0
b
2
8
:
,
,
3 69 : 3 7 5
3 5
.
A
111 : 5 9 6—60 2
13 8
II
.
B
.
0
:
3 3
5
:
0 9—
5
f1 :
t
w i h b,
0
2
,
3 7 ,
c :
.
III
8:
c
5
13,
8: d
:
II )
M
.
0
8
:
3
.
.
— 66
6
3 4 3
.
1
2
3
H
I
C
,
[
3
7
5
.
G
.
6
8
3
:
5 9 4,
II
8:
:
0
3 4
The form s of c ond itio nal sentences n ot already
explained (13 4
imply eith er th at th e supposition i s
n o t true in th e pre sent o r was n ot true in the p ast o r is
m erely possi b l e (n ot pro b a b le ) in the future The same
m ood is used in b oth clauses and t h e sam e tens e also if
b oth refer t o the same time
.
,
,
.
,
,
.
13 9
A condition p ossi b le in future time (less vivid with
.
,
E nglish auxiliaries s b ou l d or w ou l d ) h as generally the
Pres en t S u b j un ctive in b oth clauses When the action of
th e con dition al C laus e is to b e comp leted b efore the con
elusion would b egin th e Perfe ct S u b j unctive is us ed in the
M 3 64 3 6 5
conditional C laus e [ H 5 7 6 I 5 7 7 ( 5 0 9 N
A 30 7 2 w i th o 8:
G 5 96 B
.
,
.
c.
,
,
:
.
.
.
:
.
.
.
.
.
I n a c ondition wh ere th e supp osition is not viewed
as true (contrary to fact ) the I mp erfect S u b j un ctive refers
to present tim e and th e Plup erfe ct S u b j un ctive to p ast
time C f t h e E nglish if b e w er e b er e if b e b a d been b er e
140
.
.
.
S ee 141,
36 9
.
A
.
,
N ote
0
8
3
.
8:
c.
H
[
.
G
.
8
:
5 79
.
5 97
.
B
1
(5
10 :
5
1 1,
M
1,
.
66
3
:
68
3
.
S om etimes th e condition an d t h e con clusion may
refer to different times ; in such cases the verb of each
"
cl au se is p ut in th e ten se required b y its time relation
s b ou l d n ot (in present
i
in
past
time
b
e
w
e
b
a
d
c
o
e
m
f
(
)
time ) be b er e s i v en i s s et n on h i e a d es s em u s
14 1
.
,
,
,
.
I NT ROD U CT I ON
T
I ME
C O N DITI O N
5 33 3253
1
1
1)
P res en t
C o n tra ry t o
8 1w
F a ct
I mp erf
C O NC LU S I O N
I mp erf
ith
S u bj
.
45
S u bj
.
EX
Si
.
pa
b
.
t er
en e
t b er
AM P LE
a
es s e
d
es s et
t s
,
a
,
w er e b er e,
it
w o u l d be w el l
it
P l u p erf
$1 w h
Si
.
P l u p erf S u bj
.
S u bj
.
pa
ter
ben e
.
a
d f u i s s et ,
f u i s s e t , if
f
a
t b er b a d been b er e,
i t w ou l d b a v e been
P os s ibl e
l
s v iv i d
es
(
F u t ur e
s b ou l d o r
P res en t
it
P
r
f
e
(
$1 w h
P res
.
S ubj
w ou l d )
S u bj
Si p
s
.
a
it,
t er a d s i t
b
,
en e
a t b er s b ou l
s
d
be b er e, i t w ou l d be
.
w el l
N OT E
E xpression s of a b ility duty necessity and p r o
r i et
r
in
th
e
conclusion
regularly
have
the
I
mperfe
ct
o
p
y
Perfect I ndicative [ H 5 8 3 ( 5 1 1 1 N
M 3 68 A 3 1 1
G
0
B
4 3
l
3
5 97 3
‘
.
:
a
,
.
,
.
.
,
,
,
,
.
.
.
.
,
c
.
.
-
LESSO N XX IX
Conces s i on
8
9
5
:
2
8
3 ,
5 99
1
A
142
I
.
2
3 6
3 20 , e :
.
5 5 9, 3
.
14 : 5 1 :
1
:
5
5
5 49 ,
5
’
1 5 5 , 2 , g : 1 5 6, i : 2 5 5 , a , 3 :
—
0
:
6
0
6
6
:
8
:
9
34
3
5 73 5 7
.
54
,
G
.
2 64 :
66 &
z
B
.
8
8
5 5 5 7
:
-
M
18
:
.
P r ov i s o
a nd
H
[
ez
2 78 :
.
:
5 93,
2
282 :
376
29 2 :
3 1 3 : 3 14
— 10
0
8
3
3
]
28 3,
3
:
:
3 78
clauses take the S u bj unctive if intro
d u ced b y q u a m i s or u s u t l i c e t c u m o r the relative q u i
i
s
n e c l ar u s s i t
l
u
m
u
m
o
t
e
t a l tb oug b b e i s n ot fa mou s
p
p
1
H
6
2
8
M
2
8
8
II
b e b a s g r ea t p ow er
9
3
9
(
3
[
5
5
5
5 5
7
A 3 1 3 w i th o
G 6 0 6 60 8 6 3 4 B 2 7 8 2 8 3 3
8 6 ; 382
8
0
i
t
1
w
h
3
3 9
3 8
C oncessive
.
v
r
,
0
,
:
.
.
,
.
,
143
qu a m
1
,
,
,
.
.
:
,
,
,
a
,
:
:
,
-
,
,
.
,
:
.
.
:
,
:
They take the I ndicative if introduced b y q u a m
whic h i s used only f or an admitted fact q u a m qu a m
,
‘
,
,
.
LAT I N P RO SE C O MP O S I T I ON
6
4
p en s u m
cer t a
&
5
N
.
d i fii
ci l e
es
t,
t
a
fi e ri
m en
p
i n ly b a r d y et i t ca n be d on e
A 3 1 3 e 8: j 1 G 60 5 B
,
,
.
.
.
o
t es t
a
,
H
[
.
.
l t b oug b t b e t a s b i s
I
8
6
,
5
(5 5
1
I)
,
M
.
3 78,
.
.
I f introduced b y e t s i e t i a m s i o r t a m e t s i they take
th e c onstruction s o f c on ditional C lauses (s ee 13 4—141)
et i a m s i
C a t i l i n a R d m a e x e a t c o m p l fir és s c el e r a t i r e m a n e a n t
a l tb ou b Ca t i l i n e s b ou l d
o
r
f
o
m
R
o
e
m
m
a
w
n
i
c
b
e
d
m
en
g
g
y
H
8
6
1
8
I
II
M
8
w ou l d r ema i n
&
A 3 13
[
(
5 5
4
5
5 5
37
3
)
G 60 4 B 30 9 2 8: ]
144
‘
.
,
,
,
‘
,
,
,
.
.
145
ne :
m od o,
dum
or
I)
.
.
,
.
.
.
,
c.
of
,
if
,
M
.
,
Proviso ( p r ov i d ed tb a t ) introduced b y
d u m m o d o takes th e S u b j unctive n egative
v a l e as
H
1
8
[
5 7 ( 5 3,
,
.
A c l aus e
.
d um,
a
,
.
:
.
.
.
376
A
.
.
on
3 14
ly y
G
.
ou
5 73
.
B
.
w el l , I
a re
a
m g la d
.
.
'
L E S S O N X XX
Decl a r a t iv e S ent ences
Ind i r ect Di s cour s e
6 14
:
6 4 1—64 5
6
39
:
39 8
5
22 :
3 13
:
5
A
.
31 :
3 14
:
(5
33 5
.
:
6 4 7—6 5 0
3 17
5
22 :
I
2 3,
6
33 ,
1
8:
5
:
8:
5
6
33 ,
2 :
6 5 3— 6 5 5
:
2 4— 2 6
:
a
660
,
oo
1 :
B
.
f tn t e
6
A
33
,
.
2 44 ,
1,
t
wi h
I
8:
N
.
6
33 ,
:
.
II
2 60 :
:
1
9
3
B
2 68 ,
.
2 :
6 13
:
.
M
o
,
H
[
5 48
.
2
39
:
G
2
5
.
20
0
1
,
7
:
I n direct quotations dep en d up on verb s or words of
saying thinking p erc eiving and th e like generally either
as O b j ect if th e ver b is active or as su b j ect if it is p assive
1
1
2
2
I
M
A
6
G
H
6
6
1
6
1
2
2
8
1
9
3
3
4
4
3
3
3
3
)
[
3
5
(5
5 5
5 7 5
6 48
B 3 13
146
.
,
,
,
,
,
.
.
:
:
:
.
,
.
.
.
:
.
.
,
.
.
:
:
The princip a l verb in declarative sentences takes
the I nfinitive with a su b j e ct Acc us a tive Th e su b j ect i s
n ot usually o mitted in th e Lati n : f o r t i s a s y ou a r e br a v e ;
d i i t t e f o rt e m e s e b e s a i d t b a t y ou w er e br a v e
[ H 64 2
1
0
1
6
2
I
M
A
2
G
B
2
6
8
4
3
33
39
(5 3 )
5
147
.
.
,
x
s
,
.
.
.
.
.
,
,
: a
,
I
.
.
.
.
,
.
I NT ROD U CT I ON
47
The
ten se Of the I nfinitive c orresponds t o that o f
t h e direct statement The Present I nfinitive represents t h e
P r esent ; the Future represents t h e Future and the Future
Perfect ; the Perfect represents the I mp erfect Perfect and
Plu p erfect Thu s th e tens e of th e I nfinitive in in d irect
discourse i s always Present Future or Past relatively t o
the ten se of th e ver b of saying
D I R ECT
I N DI R E C T d i i t
v ani o
5 6 v e n i r e b e s a i d b e w a s comi n
a m com i n
g
g
148
.
.
,
,
.
,
,
,
.
x
,
,
,
m , [ w i ll
v en i , I ca m e
v en i a
com e
3
6
v en t
s
e
v
’
M
H
6
44
[
.
2 60
.
A
.
.
fir u m
en i s s
6
33 ,
A
be
e,
G
.
.
b e s a i d b e w ou l d
e s s e,
sa id
65 3
.
B
be b a d
me
co
a —c :
2 70 , 1
.
com e
,
All su b ordinate verb s rem a in or b ecome S u b j u n c
tive The te n se of the S u b j unctive dep ends on that of th e
verb o f sa y ing in accordance with th e rules for sequence
o f tenses
b u t after a Perfect I nfinitive even wh en
t h e principal verb is prim ary the secondary sequence is
regularly found : C a e s a r d i i t s é e 1s q u os f n es v e l l e n t d at fi r u m
149
.
.
,
,
,
''
x
es s e ,
Ca es a r
w i s b ed
39 8
.
A
.
sa
i d tb a t b e w ou l d g i ve t b em tb e bou n d a r i es t b ey
H
8
4
[
5
.
.
6
33 ,
2
i
64 3
:
8: B , w i t h
1
V
:
2
(4 9 5
5 4
:
N
,
.
2
G 5 18
.
.
:
65 0
:
M 3 I 6, 6
:
65 4 : 65 5
:
.
.
B
39 6 :
2
:
39
1
:
4
3
.
15 0
I n tran sferring direct discours e into indirect b e
very careful in regard to the person o f pronouns I f the
su b j ect o f the I nfinitive refers t o th e same person a s that
of the ver b o f saying th e reflexive s e is used ; other p r o
no u n s O ffer no S pecial difficulty
.
,
.
,
.
D irect
:
eg o v
I ndirect :
di
ci
ob rs
t
s
b a s g i v en y ou
b a v e g i v en y ou t b c l a n d
iis
a gr u m
d
e d i s s e, be s a s
b
e
y
)
m d ed i ,
‘
a gru
e
(
v
ob i s
t b em
)
(
or
.
'
tb c l a n d
Di r ecti ons f or Accu r a cy
.
—
Take th e sentence apart b y
itself and study its meaning c arefully In the E nglish
.
8
4
L
AT I N P R O S E C O MP O SI T I ON
I m agin e yourself th e sp e a ke r an d thoroughly understan d
Th en
b oth th e direct an d th e indirect forms in E nglish
write in Latin wh at is o r was really said i e the direct
quotation
Finally transfer a pc o r di n g to a b ove princi
p les into the in direct : H e s a i d tb a t b e w ou l d d o tb i s
?
a
What did h e really s y
I (o r p ossi b ly b e) w i l l d o tb i s
referring t o tim e future relative to the tim e o f s aying
D irect : e g o h oe f a c i a m (or i s f a c i e t ) ; I n direct dep ending
.
.
,
.
,
.
,
,
.
.
,
'
on d i x i t :
8
(
6
or ou m
)
h 6 0 f a c t ii r u m
es s e
.
L E S S O N X XX I
I nd i r ect Di s cour se
M 40 2—40 4 A 33 7
.
.
Con d it i ona l S en t en ces
G
.
.
6 5 6—6 5 9
.
B
.
— 22
1
3 9 3
H
6
6
6
8
4
4
[
-
.
.
]
I n transferring a c onditional sentence from direct
discourse into indirect spec ial care S h ould b e taken
Th e condition al clause as su b ordinate al ways h as th e
S u b j un ctive mo od
I n a contrary to fact c ondition th e
ten se ( I mp erfect o r Plup erfect ) is n ever c h anged even
after a p rim ary tense I n all oth er conditions h owever
the rule for sequen c e is o b served
15 1
.
.
,
,
,
.
,
,
,
.
.
D
P res en t
P N DI N G
DE E
I R ECT
t S i mp l e
s i a d es s et
co n t t o fa ct
s i a d e r a t s i mp l e
s i a d f u i s s et
c o n t t o fa ct
p rob a b l e
8 1 a d er i t
s i a d s i t p o s s i bl e
p r ob a b l e
s i f ec e r i t
t
f
P
r
F
)
(
s
i
a d es
,
''
,
.
''
,
,
F u t u re
,
,
,
u
.
e
.
.
ON
P N DI N G
d ix i t
DE E
si
a
d e s s et
ON
5
1
a
d e s s et
s
i
a
d es s et
8
1
a
d f u i s s et
a
d
a
d e s s et
''
s i
es s et
8
1
s
i f ec i s s et
5
LAT I N P RO SE CO MP O S IT I O N
0
S u b j unctive is regularly used
s u
as
o s s es s
p
a es a r
C
(
ca
i on es
v eni r et
ri o v i s t u s
A
:
A r i ov i s t u s
,
m e i n to b i s l a n ds
r es
a s b ed
; C a es a
r
on
p
in
p ly
nu
in
o ur
w by b e
re
p ondit
r es
dit
m
rec en
t i u m i n i fi r i ar u m m e m o r i a m s é d ep d n e r e p o s s e Ca es a r a s b ed i n
i t w a s p os s i bl e f or b i m t o forg et t b e r ecen t w r ong s
r ep ly if
2
i
2
i
h
0
H
6
t
h
8
w
t
6
t
1
2
II
i
w
w
h
6
1
2
2
4
3
[
5
5 (5 3
5 9
M 39 4 3 9 5 A 3 34 3 3 8 w i th N 1 2
G 46 7 65 1 R 1
I)
—
1
1
00
1
B 3
4
3 5
,
.
:
,
.
:
.
.
15 4
:
,
.
:
.
a :
,
,
.
:
,
a
.
:
,
:
.
.
,
.
.
,
I m p erative form s whether S u b j unctive or I mp era
tive in the direct disc ourse h a ve the S u b j unctive in the
indirect
T h e negative is alw a ys n e z 11 6 11 i d f a c e r e d o n ot
d o t b i s ; d i x i t n e i d f a c e r es b e s a i d t b a t y ou s b ou l d n ot d o
,
.
,
.
,
,
tb i s ;
tb ey
M
.
né
sa
39 3
i d t b a t b e s b ou l d
A
.
l et b i m
i d fa c i a t ,
t R
i
h
w
339
.
,
N
.
G
.
d o tb i s
d o tb i s
n ot
2
.
n ot
.
65
2
H
6
2
4 ,
[
.
.
B
.
d i x er u n t
1
6
3
.
a
.
nei
d f a c er e t ,
t
wi h 4
(5
III )
23,
.
]
The ver b s in these con struction s follow the rule
i
1
h
w
2
H
6
8
t
f o r sequence o f tenses (1 1 3 8 2
4
4
[
M 3 9 6 A 33 6 B N 1 33 9 N 1 G 6 5 4 6 5 5 B 3 18 ]
15 5
.
.
.
.
,
.
:
.
,
.
.
:
.
:
,
.
.
.
.
L E S S O N X XX I I I
Infor ma l
6 49 , I : 6 5 2
2
G 662
34
.
15 6
I nd i r ect
5
:
.
66 3
.
B
.
Di s cou r s e
28 :
5
2 8 6, I
a nd
A t t r a ct i on
M 35 7
29 ,
:
.
:
[ H 5 88
.
.
400 :
0
4
5
.
A
.
11
,
0
4
3
2
:
3 3
’
I f so me p art of a statement rests o n an other s
autho rity th e S u b j unctive is used on th e principle Of
indirect dis course although a verb of saying need n o t b e
expres sed This is es p ecially co m m on in relative cl a uses
s ib i
i
m
u
a
e
a
n
e
c
fi
and causal clauses W ith q u o d (cf
q
p
d on a t a e s s e t p e n d eb a t
b e w a s sp en d i ng m on ey w b i cb b e
.
,
,
.
.
,
,
sa
i d , b a d been g i v en b i m
M 35 7
.
:
400
.
A
.
340 :
1
4
3
.
'
—
a,
a
[
H 5 88
.
t R G
wi h
.
.
,
I I : 6 49 , 1
66 2
:
66 3 ,
2
5
.
B
.
2 8 6, 1 :
28:
I
)
INT R OD U C PION
5
I
S om etimes a c l ause dep ending on a S u b j unctive
clause and expressing a n essenti a l part of that clause h as
its ver b also in the S u b j un ctive
S ometi m es a fter an
I nfinitive the S u b j unctive i s thus u sed This use i s b est
explained b y the term a t t r a ct i on s c i t q u ar e m i h i q u a e p o s
s i n t d on e n t
b e b n ow s w by t b ey g i v e m e w b a t ev er i b ey ca n
05
2
2
1
2 9 II & N I )
M
A
i
t
h
N
G
B
6
w
66
1
H
4
34
3
[
5
(5
15 7
.
,
.
.
.
,
'
,
.
3 24 ,
.
.
.
.
.
a
,
.
.
.
,
.
1
L E S S O N XXX IV
Comma nd s
48 7
B
M
:
Ex h or t a t i on s
and
— 22
1
3 9 3
.
A
.
.
2 66 :
— 61
H
8
4
( 3
[
559 5
.
.
G
2 69 :
.
.
26
3
2 66—2 6 8 :
:
4 8 4 , 11 8: Iv
:
2 7 0 —2 7 2 :
2 75
.
2 74— 2 7 6 :
.
The I mp erative is used in p ositive comm ands an d
entreaties o f the sec o n d p erson
Th e tense i s usu a lly
Present as the Future is rare excep t in decrees an d form al
com m ands : d o mi m a n et e r em a i n a t b om e [ H 5 60 8 4
—
1
t
M
A
G
20
6
2
66
2
1
B
i
h
6
8
8
&
8
w
9
3 9 3
3
(4 7
15 8
.
.
,
,
1
,
:
.
.
22
:
.
.
:
.
’
2
a
.
.
.
.
2
-
2
The H ortatory S u b j un ctive (negative u s ) is used
f or the first and third persons which are missin g in the
I mperative The tens e is usually Present : 11 6 0 f a c i am u s
15 9
.
,
.
l et
t
B
d o tb i s ;
us
wi h
I
2
2 74 :
.
,
2
75
8
4
( 3
,
h
e h as
4 84 ,
:
t
I V)
II
l et
f a c i am u s ,
M
.
2
1
:
3
.
u s n ot
2
2
3
A
.
d o tb i s
.
R
2 66
[H 5 59
.
.
G
.
2 63
.
,
.
wi h 1
A negative comm a nd or prohi b ition in t h e second
p erson m a y b e ex p ressed ( I ) b y n on with the Present
I nfinitive ; (2 ) b y u s wit h t h e Perfect S u b j unctive (rare in
classic a l prose ) ; o r ( 3 ) b y c a e u s with the S u b j unctive
D o not use t h e I m p erative wit h a neg a tive to ex pres s p ro
hi b i t i on : n Ol i t e h Oc f c e r e n e h Oc f eo e i t i
c
et e (n é h Oc
)
M 32 1 4 3
f c i at i s d o n ot d o t b i s
N 4
[ H 5 61 I
A 6 9 w i th
G 27 27
2
2
B
t
t
2
6
i
h
2
w
8
7
7
160
.
v
.
a
a
.
,
2
,
.
a
.
.
s
r
0 :
.
1, 2 :
,
,
2,
2,
.
av
.
.
.
,
a
c:
:
,
1,
22
.
5
LAT I N P R O SE C O MP O S IT I ON
2
L E S S O N XX X V
Wi s h es
G
.
2
6
5 ,
H
[
.
26 1
2 60 :
2 :
.
.
55
1,
B
.
II
8
55
:
2 80 , 2 , a
2 79 :
4 S4 , I)
1
.
M
.
3 25
.
A
.
.
26
7
.
]
The S u b j un ctive ( negativ e u s ) is used to express a
Wish Th e Pres ent (or rarely the Perfect ) is u s ed when
th e p o ssi b ility for th e wis h t o b e fulfilled has not p assed ;
th e I mperfect o r Pluperfect when it is known th at th e
wis h canno t b e fulfilled T he I mp erfect refers to present
time and the Plup erfect t o past (cf conditional sentenc e s )
16 1
.
.
.
.
,
.
Th e particle u t i n a m (u t i n a m n e) m a y b e used with
the Present and is regularly us ed with t h e I mp erfect an d
Pluperfect S o metime s v e l i mo r v o l l e m i s used instead o f
v el i m v e n i a t
u t i n a m : v en i a t
r
ay b e com e ; u t i n a m n e
m
o
(
)
v en i r e t
w ou l d t b a t b e w er e n ot com i ng ; u t i n a m (o r v e l l e m )
16 2
.
,
.
,
,
v
en i s s e t ,
O tb a t b e b a d
me
co
.
L E S S O N X X XV I
—
t
i
P o ent i al a nd Del i b er a t v e
(4 7 7
2
59
B
.
.
,
27
II
7
:
:
8
4 5
2 80
:
M
.
:
2
4
3
2
3 7
H
[
.
5
.
A
.
55
21 :
2 68 :
1
1
3 .
G
.
2
-
25
557
6,
2 :
=
5 5 9,
25
7
]
I n E nglish the auxiliary verb s m ay m i gb t w ou l d
etc are often u sed t o express an Opinio n in more mild
or p olite form
S o metimes this s ee m s t o co rre spond t o
the c onclusion of so m e conditio n un derstoo d
I n Latin
this u s e is exp re ssed b y th e Potential S u b j unctive (nega
tive 11 6 m)
163
.
,
,
.
,
.
.
.
,
I NT ROD U CT I ON
53
Referring to present or future time the tense i s
—
Present (rarely Perfect ) ; referring to p ast ti m e
usually
—
in t h e indefinite s econd p erson
t h e tense is I mp erfect :
16 4
ali
q
u
,
.
is di
cat
so
,
me
on e
m ay
sa
y ;
w ou l d b a v e t b oug b t b i m f ool i s b
(4 7 7
25
8
.
,
II
B
.
:
485
2 80
:
&
48 6,
M
I
.
327
.
eu
m
H
[
.
A
.
s
tultum
55
.
1
1
a
,
3
2 :
,
c r ed e r é s
5 5 4,
t R
wi h
1
3
b
.
.
555
:
G
.
ou
y
,
6
55
=
25
7
,
2
1
The D eli b erative S u b j unctive (negative n on ) is
used in q uestions asked merely for e ffect o r to express
dou b t or imp ossi b ility o f fulfill ment The Present refers
to present or to future time ; the I mp erfect t o past time
q u i d d i c a m w b a t a m I t o s ay q u i d d i c er e m
w b a t cou ld
M 3 24 A
l s ay ? [ H 5 5 2 5 5 7 5 5 9 4 & N 5 5 9 5 & N (48 6 I I )
G 25 9 B 277
26 8
]
165
.
,
.
:
.
.
.
.
.
:
a
,
.
:
.
,
.
,
.
.
.
.
The intention in the follo w ing ex ercises is t o
give th e s p irit o f th e author in everyd ay E nglish C on
se q uently t a ke speci a l care in the c hoice o f Latin words
and study how to make good Latin sentences N ote f or
example that in Latin many se p arate E nglish sentences
m a y b e co m b ined into on e
I n short aim t o write Latin
not E nglish with Latin words
Ca u t i on
—
.
,
.
,
,
.
,
.
,
CA ESA R
E X E R C IS E S
W rd s
o
p
t
f
os s es s i on o
-
Sq r
ua e
to the
s
.
r k t
e ti n
b
c
ac
o
y
W r
tr nsl t d by i ngl e w rd e g bt i n
r k ts
b
m i tt d i tra n l t i n
t
L t i n r n d ri ng F i g r i n h ea y ty p ref r
t i n See C t i n p 5 3
b y h p h en s a r e t o b e
o ds i n
ou nd b a c
c o nn ec e d
e s
i n d i ca
s of
t he
t
r
e
t he
I tr
n
a e
e
a re
e
a
odu c
a
o
e
a s
o
o
e
o
au
,
.
.
,
1
.
n
e
.
o
s a
v
e
a
o
.
e
.
.
AR R AN G E M E NT OF T H E S E NT E N C E
B G II
,
u es
.
.
o
1
( 6)
-
6
-
When C aes ar was wintering in Gau l th e B elgian s
Th ey feared
b eg a n to consp ire against th e Roman people
1
C aesar a n d his army b ecause h e had already entirely
2
su b due d the H elvetian s an d th e German s C aesar was
quickly informed o f th ese m ovements [ things ] b y La b ie
nus the lieutenant wh o m h e had left i n G aul D isturb ed
b y thes e rep orts h e h astened to enroll two n ew legion s
an d at the b eginning o f sum m er sent th em t o L a b i en u s
Wh en C aesar himself cam e to th e army h e learn ed how
3
g r eat forces the B e l gian s were c ollecting H e esp ecially
encouraged th e Remi wh o h ad pl ac ed th em selves under
th e protection of th e Rom an p eople and ordered th em to
keep th e forces of th e e n emy ap art H e him self led the
army acro ss th e river A x o n a and th ere left a garrison
4
Th e B elgi a n s m ea n w h i le b egan to attack B i b ra x a town
o f th e Re m i
16 6
,
.
.
,
.
.
,
,
,
,
.
,
.
,
,
.
.
i
,
.
1 om n i n o
3
‘
.
15 3
4
.
i n t er i m
.
B G II
.
.
7
,
-
5
13
SI M P LE A G R EE M E NT S
B G II
.
.
)
3
rchers a n d S linger s wh om C aesar
1
h a d sent to aid [ for an aid to ] t h e towns p eople the B el
gi a n s s et out toward C aesar and p itched ca m p less th a n
C aesar h a d fortified a place suitab le f o r
t w o miles o ff
drawing u p a b attle line b u t was refraining from battle
Between the
o n account of the m ultitud e o f th e enemy
After
t w o armies w a s a s w amp whic h neither dared cross
delaying a few days in their camp th e B elgian s attempted
to o b tain p o ssession of a fortr es s which guarded [ w a s for
a guard to ] the b ridge Their expectation [ hope ] failed
them for C aesar s forces a t t a Ck ed them in the river and
repulsed t h em [ having attacked repuls ed th em ] At this
time th e Bellovaci were in formed that the A ed u i were lead
ing an army into their co untry O n learning this [ this
h aving b een learned ] they hastened hom e C aesar heard
the great n oIs e and c onfusion and at d ay b reak [ at first
light ] followed with all his forces H e a ttacked th e rear
with his cavalry and killed a gr eat num b er The n ex t
day h e led th e army again st the S uession es whos e C hief
men were given as hostages
16 7
.
O n the arrival
7
,
—1
(7
— 10
of a
,
.
-
,
.
.
,
-
-
.
’
,
.
,
.
,
.
,
.
.
,
.
P ER I P H R AST I C C ONJ UG AT I ON S
B G
.
168
b iani
were
ture ]
.
.
T EN SES ( 11—15 )
1 4—2 1
11,
Afterwards he received t h e Bel l ovaci an d the A m
under his p rotection [ into his fait h ] Whil e they
giving h ost a ges h e in q uired what t h e ch a r a cter [ n a
T h e s e were men of great valor
o f t h e N ervii was
.
.
,
.
1
120
.
C AESAR
6
5
an d h ad not ac cepted any condition s of surrender A gain st
th em C aesar n ow hastened H is marc h was hindered at
the S a b i S river b y frequent hedges
At this place th e
"
N ervii intended to attack his army thinki n g
We shall
defe at the Ro man s (while ) encu m b ered with their b a g
gage
C aesar however had n o w fo r a long tim e b een
placing h i s b aggage train in the rear o f [ after ] S ix legions
wh
ic
h
were
unencum
b
ered
O
n
th
eir
arrival
they
were
(
)
fo rtifying th e camp b u t suddenly all the N ervii rushed
fro m th e forest an d m ade an attack up on the m Th ey
had t o leave their work an d draw up a lin e of b attle
1
Th ey with d i fli c u l t y with sto od th e attack o f th e enemy ;
2
f o r th ey w ere o ff their guard and c ould n ot seek their
st a ndard s b u t eac h man w a s fighting wh ere h e
ow n
c hanc ed to stand [ stood b y c hanc e ]
.
.
.
,
.
,
,
-
.
,
.
.
-
-
.
,
.
U SES OF T H E I N FI N I T I V E ( 16 —20)
B G 11 2 2 —2 9
.
.
,
N evertheless the Ro man s wer e n ot put t o flight
That
b u t b ravely tried t o rep el th e attac k of th e N ervii
p art o f C aes ar s forces whic h defended th e camp [ what
3
p art was f o r a de fense to th e c amp ] o n the left and o n
the front had routed th e A tre b ate s an d cro ssed th e river
in pursuit [ pursuing ] A n d S O th e c am p was stripp ed of
defen ders and h ither the N ervii h astened I n a S h ort
time they h ad gained po s session of it an d b egan to s u r
roun d the seve nth and the twelfth legions o n the right
M ean whil e th e cavalry of the T r ev er i fled h ome for th e y
th ought that the N ervii h a d overwhelmed the Ro m ans a n d
that C a es a r a n d his arm y were in flight
D uring this
16 9
,
.
,
.
’
"
.
.
,
.
,
.
1
Cf
.
t t II
ex
,
,
6
2
.
i mp r ud en s
3
'
.
de
nsi o
fi
4
'
.
Cf
.
t t II
ex
,
,
12
.
CAESAR
8
5
1
The survivo rs C aesar sold (a s slaves ) Pu b lius C rassus
h is lieutenant h aving b rought m any o f th e mariti m e st a tes
un der th e sway [ p ower ] o f the Ro man p eople ( so ) i n
formed C aes ar A fter su b duing S O many st a tes S inc e
f
o
only
a
small
p
art
th
e
sum
m
er
was
left
es
ar
led
C
a
(
)
his legio n s into winter quarters an d a thanksgiving w a s
2
decreed at Ro me
.
,
,
,
.
,
,
,
.
AN D A N S WERS
Q U ES T I ON S
B G
.
1—3
111,
.
‘
D id C aesar lead his army with h im into I taly ?
h e sent th e twelfth l eg Io n under the leaders hip of
N
4
G
to th e Alp s Why did h e place this legion there ?
5
B ecaus e th e road w a s d a ngerous for traders and the
duties were exc essive [ great ] an d b ecause he wis hed
Gal b a to su b due the G auls w h o h eld th e fortres ses H ow
?
m any b attle s did h e fight [ make ]
G al b a con
S everal
6
?
quered this p eople did h e n ot Yes and b egan to fortify
f
h
i
a
T S vill ge was n ot
O ct o d u r u s as winter quarters
Sit
6
?
it
N o it w a s in a valley and
u a t e d o n a m o untain was
w a s divided b y a river into two p arts o n e of wh ich h e gave
to th e G auls D id C aesar wis h to op en th e roads or to
?
h old this p lac e as a p erp etual possession
H e wish ed to
j oin it to th e provin c e D id t hey try t o renew the w a r o r
not ? They left t h e village an d to ok th e heights H ow
quickly was Gal b a infor m ed o f this ? What did h e do ?
H e called a council o f w a r and all gave [ spoke ] their
o pinion s What p lan [ wh at of plan ] did h e adopt [ take ]
H e decided to defend th e camp
17 1
.
I
,
“
.
,
,
-
.
‘
.
,
,
’
~
.
,
,
,
,
,
.
“
.
,
.
-
-
,
.
.
1
Cf
.
t t
ex
,
11,
28
3
.
6
E pr
x
es s
A
t A
te
f rm O f t h q
bl a i v e
b y th e
o
b s ol u
e
4
.
ues
ti
ca r
on
.
5
.
p er i cu l os us
'
.
B
G III, 4—6
59
:
.
.
OBJ ECT C ASES —
B
G
.
.
A CCU SAT I V E
I.
32
3
9)
(
-
—6
III , 4
I n a S hort ti m e th e ene m y rushed down from th e
"
higher places an d m a de an att a ck u p on th e Ro m a ns hurl
ing stones and j avelins
Gal b a s forces fought continu
o u s l y for S ix h ours a n d (though ) hard pressed withstood
1
the first assaults B ut fin a l ly wea p on s failed them an d
b ecause of their s m a ll num b er n ot even the wo unde d could
de p a rt b u t t h e ene m y ( w hen ) exhausted b y wounds o r b y
fighting [ b a ttle ] ke p t with drawing an d fresh forces s u c
Then B a culu s w h o had th e most influenc e
c ee d e d (t h e m )
of t h e ce n turions a sked Gal b a his plan
Th ey decided
m
m
it
pleased
the
to
ake
a
s
ally
an
d
to
ro
ut
th
e
enemy
[
]
2
And so after resting awhile an d p icking up the spent
m issiles t h e soldiers suddenly sallied fort h and drove the
G a uls in flight
For thinking the Roman s were c on
quered the Gaul s h a d come to the c amp
When this
3
b attle h a d b een fought [ made ] Gal b a b urned the villages
the
country
a n d led his legion across th e mountai n s to
f
o
(
)
the Allo b roges H e had not done all that C a esar wished
17 2
,
.
,
’
.
-
,
,
.
,
-
,
,
,
.
-
,
.
,
.
,
,
,
.
,
.
,
.
.
OBJ E CT C ASES —
B
G
.
.
2
.
G EN IT I V E
I II,
4
7
4
( 0 4 8)
-
1
C aesar
h ad to con q uer th e peop les of G a ul on e b y
1
on e
M any o f these g a ve h i m a s ho stages t h e son s of
5
their chiefs \ S o m eti m es the Gauls regretted this a n d
wished to get t h em b a ck O n account of the scarcity of
grain C aes a r h a d sent his legions into winter q uarter s
17 3
.
‘
.
.
.
,
1
dEn i qu e
.
2
p
os t
q
ua
t P rf t I n di t i
m wi h
5
e
ec
n on n u m qu a
'
ca
ve
m;
3
C f 21 24
-
.
.
l i qu a n d o
‘
a
.
.
CAESAR
60
am ong m any states I n (the country o f ) t h e Andes h e
h ad placed a part o f his a rmy under th e leadership o f
This m an s ent am b assadors t o th e V en eti for
C rassus
grain T he V eneti detain ed them for th ey th ought th a t
b y m ean s o f his a m b a s s a d or s t h ey c ould recover their
1
children who m they had n ot forgotten
T heir neigh b ors
were in duc ed t o give the m aid an d allies were sum mone d
fro m Britain C rassus h owever qu ickly informed C aesar
o f this an d accu sed the Gauls o f con spiracy
A S soon as
C aesar had b uilt S hip s and p rep ared forces he b egan t o
wage war with the V eneti H e sent o n e o f his lieuten ants
toward th e Rhin e and C ras sus and S a b i n u s into n eigh b or
ing states D o y ou remem b er the n am e o f the young man
?
who m h e plac ed i n co mmand of t h e fleet
.
.
,
.
'
.
,
,
.
,
,
.
.
,
.
,
.
-
-
-
OBJ E CT C A S ES
B G
.
3
.
D AT I V E
.
4
1
6
5
(
)
-
1 2 —1 6
111,
h ad determined t o m ak e war up on t h e
2
V eneti for they had n ot o b eyed h im b u t had even detain ed
his lieutenants I t was n ot easy to get p os session o f t h eir
towns fro m th e lan d b ecaus e of th e tide an d th ey h ad a
large fleet of S hip s as a defen se C aesar also had b uilt a
fleet w hic h B rutus c omm an ded b u t it could not b e b rought
up during a great p art Of th e summer I n the m eantime
C ae sar h ad taken m any towns b u t n o m en for th e V eneti
b y means of their S hip s kept withdrawing to other town s
T heir ship s were b etter suited to th e great tides of this
s ea
N either could our b e aks harm the Gallic S hip s n or
could ou r men easily hurl weap o n s upon them O n th e
arrival of ou r fleet the V en eti hasten ed to m ake an attack
17 4
C a es ar
.
,
,
.
,
.
,
.
,
,
.
.
.
2
'
a
r eo
p
.
B G
.
61
1 7 —1 9
111,
.
1
2
up on it Th ey relied upon their sails an d knowl edge o f
the shoals The Ro m ans fought n ear C aesar s camp an d
3
this increased their courage
T hey used s harp hooks
attached to long poles With these they b roke away the
sail yards of th e enemy s S hip s and the b arb arian s tried to
seek ( a place of ) safety But there w a s a calm and th ey
could not escape After t h e defeat o f the fleet the V eneti
surrendered t o C aesar w h o sold them a s S laves
.
’
.
,
.
.
’
-
,
.
,
.
,
.
,
OBJ E CT
C
A SES
—
B G
.
4
A B LAT I V E
.
111,
.
17
-
-
5 7)
19
Whil e C aesar was fighting in V enetia Q T i t u r i u s
S a b i n u s with a p art o f th e army was in the c ountry o f th e
This people had revolted and had put Vi r id ov i x
Ven ell i
in command o f their forces Vi r i d ov i x daily led forth his
tro ops b u t T i t u r i u s did not wis h to fight in the a b sence of
his commander unles s all things were m ost favora b le and
remained in camp B ecause of h is hesitation the scorn o f
4
the b ar b arian s w a s great an d they dared almost t o attack
the c amp T i t u r i u s needed t h e assistance o f a Gaul an d
made u s e o f on e o f th e b arb ar i ans wh o was in h is army
H e f or a reward stated to Vi r i d ov i x th at C aesar was b eing
conquered in V en etia and that S a b i n u s intended to s et out
t h e n ext night t o h i s aid
The Gauls b elieved t h e deserter
a n d thought that b
uicknes
s
they
could
overwh
elm
th
e
y q
Ro m a n s They rushed to the camp from which th e
Rom a n s unexpectedly sallied and made an attack upon
the m The y surpassed the Ven ell i in p osition v alor and
training and easily conquere d them
The other states
17 5
,
.
.
.
.
,
,
,
.
,
,
.
.
,
,
.
.
,
.
,
,
.
2 s ci en t i a
4
Th e
S bj ti
u
,
ec
ve
G
eni
ti
ve
i n Ca es a
r
.
a nd
r
Ci ce
o u s ua l l
y p rec
ed es
its
noun
.
62
C AE S AR
then surrendered to S a b i n u s
C aesar was glad to hear
o
f
h
eard
gladly
this
victory
an
d
at
the
same
time
informed
[
]
S a bi n u s that th e V eneti also were defeated
.
.
PAS S I V ES ( 5 8
B G III
.
D o y ou
.
-
6 2)
2 0 —2 2
,
remem b er the nam e of the oth er lieu
tenant w h o had b een S ent into o n e of the neigh b oring
?
state s during the war with th e V eneti
H e w a s ordered
t o g o into Aquitani a a regio n in whic h many years b efore
a Roman army h ad b een repulsed and its c ommander
S lain
C ras sus the lieutenant h ad to provide an army
An d s o the b ravest men were sum moned fro m the provinc e
an d were led into th e country of th e S on t i a t es This
p eople relied o n their valor an d an am b ush T heir c avalry
was easily defeated and o u r m en pursued into a defile in
which infantry had b een stationed T he enemy suddenly
attacked the m with all their forces an d a long and fierc e
keen
attle
was
fought
there
The
Romans
are
said
b
[
]
to h ave fought b ravely (th ough ) with out their commander
an d th e enemy were driven b ack
The town
I n chief
1
A diat u n
was at length captured b u t all were sp a red
nus h ad b een made c ommander Of th e S o l d u r i i who
were not asked th eir Op inion b u t were ordered to m a ke
a s ally When this was discovered b y the Ro m ans th ey
rush ed to arm s an d drove th e S old u r ii b ack t o th e town
H owever thos e w h o h ad attempted to b re a k o u t were n o t
h armed b y the Ro m an s b u t the s am e term s of surrender
w ere gr a nted th e m b y C rassus
17 6
.
n ot
,
,
.
,
,
.
.
.
,
.
,
.
-
.
,
.
,
,
,
,
.
.
,
,
.
B G
.
111,
.
23
-
26
P O S SESS I ON (6 3
B G
.
17 7
111,
.
-
.
63
67 )
2 3 —2 6
A fter th e S o n t i a t e s had b een thu s defeated b y
.
C rassus ,
war was made up on the rest of A q uitania Thes e
1
states h a d town s (whic h were ) fortified in Rom a n fashion
2
w
h
as
leaders
those
o had learned
fro
a n d had C hosen
m
( )
S ertorius had b een a general in
S ertorius th e art of war
the ar my o f M arius b u t was for many years in S pain H e
w a s co n sidered a very b rave man and a superior le a der
Aquitania w a s a neigh b ori n g ( country ) of S pain and thence
th e Gauls had m any auxilia ries
Bec ause o f this they
increased greatly in num b er and a ttempted to shut o ff o u r
men from supplies The b arb ari a n s h ad provisions en ough
for this war an d h a d determined t o delay and fight in safety
And s o they rem ained in their camp whenever C rassus
gave them an opportunit y for b attle The Rom an soldiers
thought them tim id and were eager to rush ag a in st their
camp C rassu s was o b liged [ had ] to fight and o n th e
next d ay attacked th e ene m y
H e ke p t exhorting his
m
n
e
u
b
t
he
had
very
m
any
auxiliaries
who
were
n
ot
(
)
much trusted b y h i m a n d th e en emy fought b ravely Fo r
this reason [ cause ] h e could gain n o entrance to their
cam p This h owever was not carefully guarded at th e
re a r gate an d the Ro m an s c av a lry inform ed their leader
of this W h at w a s done ? C r a ssus q uickly sent a p art of
h i s f orces b y a round a b out [ longer ] w a y and th ey ca m e
to th e fortific a tion s while t h e rest were inte n t o n the b attl e
T h us the ene m y (were ) surrounded (a n d ) ru sh e d fro m t h e
ca m p in flight b u t ne a rly a ll were killed b y th e cavalry
.
,
.
,
.
.
,
.
.
.
.
.
,
.
,
.
,
.
,
,
’
-
,
.
-
,
.
.
,
1
Tra nsl a t e i n t wo w ays
.
C AESAR
64
D ES C R I PT I ON —
B G
.
.
BY
P H RASE ( 6 8
111,
27
-
-
75
)
29
B ecaus e of the victory o f C ras sus this p art o f Gaul
surrendered C a esar th e s a m é y ear attempted to p acify
th e M orin i an d th e M en a p i i But th ey fought in a differ
ent way fro m the others trusting in th eir forests an d b e
caus e o f h eavy rains th e Ro man s could n ot finish their
work an d s o were led into winter quarters C aes a r has
written a b out all th e s e wars in Gaul H e h ad b een a m a n
1
in his city am on g the p le b s and then
o f great i n flu en ce
2
in G aul w a s winning great glory H e was a general o f
great valo r and in swiftnes s o f m ovement surpassed all
others The Gauls were free and very b rave b u t in nearly
3
all th e state s th ere were two faction s the o n e o f which
was th e ple b s th e oth er th e n o b ility [ n o b les ] This w a s
a great advantage [ use ] t o C aesar w h o united [ j oin ed
him self ] with o n e an d was thus a b le easily to con quer
4
th e oth er H e also sup ported h imself a n d his army on
5
plund er from [ of ] the Gauls Leaders of th e greatest
s kill fought with h im b u t h e c on quered them all Th e
Gaul s often revolte d [ made re b ellion ] yet C aesar defeated
them an d m ade them allies o f the Roman p eople Finally
Gaul wh ic h h ad b een a free lan d f or [ through ] s o m any
years c ame into the hands [ power ] Of Ro m e
17 8
.
.
,
,
.
,
,
.
,
.
,
.
,
,
.
,
.
,
,
.
.
.
,
,
.
,
.
,
D ES C R I P TI ON
—
B G IV
.
C LAU SE
BY
.
(7 6
-
79)
1—3
,
While C aesar was su b duing Gaul th e German s
kept cro ssing th e R h ine wh i c h is a river b etween Ger
17 9
,
.
,
1
Cf
.
t t
ex
,
I I I, 8
«
.
2 a
d ip z s cor
3
'
.
f
a ct i o
'
.
5
p
r a ed a
.
C AESAR
66
dwelt in the ir b ui l dings o n b oth b anks of th e river This
victory w a s full o f danger [ dangerous ] t o th e Ro mans for
the Germ an s were men o f great courage and G aul was
gener a lly anxiou s f o r a revolution Therefore C aesar was
at on c e info rm ed of this th rou g h m essengers fro m his lieu
tenants H e rem em b ere d the incon stancy o f the G auls
“
and thought : I mu st drive th e Germ an s o u t o f G a ul
an d I m ust not trust the G auls
By fo rced [ very great ]
m arche s h e h astened t o the Rhine (O n ) learning o f his
1
arrival th e German s by mean s o f am b assadors asked
Th ey said t o C aesar
C ae sar for a h om e an d for p eace
We were driven from o u r country b y the S uevi wh o a r e
superio r even to th e gods in strength and are th e only
on es w h o c a n con quer us We will b e your friends if you
will grant t hese (things ) to u s Yo u w ill n ot rep ent th is
f o r eac h o f us will s erve y o ur people
B ut we S hall (b e)
unwilling (to ) return to o u r h omes for the S uevi are o u r
en emies an d we shall b e c rushed b y them
.
,
,
.
.
,
,
.
.
,
,
,
.
,
.
.
,
.
,
.
,
M ANN ER AND A CC O M PA N I M E NT
B
G IV 8
.
.
,
-
(8 5
—8 7
)
12
did n ot avail himself o f [ use ] th e friend ship
O ffered b y th e German s b u t ordered th em to cro ss the
Rhine with all their (possession s ) H e told th em th at
they might live with the U b ii N othin g m ore could b e
granted b y C aesar f o r they c ould n ot b e trusted Their
a m b assadors returned to their c amp
C aesar was a d
v a n c i n g quickly b u t with very great care and the cavalry
was sent ah ead The h o rsemen of th e en emy were a b sent
at this time in th e c ountry Of the A m b i v a r i t i foraging and
18 1
.
C aesar
,
.
.
.
,
.
,
,
.
,
,
B G IV
.
.
,
67
1 3— 1 6
pillagi n g Therefore th e Roman s march could n ot b e
prevented and the Ger m an s again sought fro m C aesar a
day f or a truce This (request ) C aesar granted and he
did not adv a nce more than four miles that d a y But soon
after [ after b y a little ] the G erman s caught S ig h t o f
C aesar s c a valry and th inking h e w a s attacking with all
his forces th e en emy S horsemen 8 00 in num b er q uickly
1
made a c harge u p on the Ro m an s and th ey [ w h o ] were
thrown into confusion even b y this small force Though
the Roman s resisted very b ravely a s long as they c ould
th ey were final l y driven into flight ; many horses were
stab b ed an d many b rave men were killed Piso o n e o f
the S lain w a s t h e s on of a very distinguished A quitanian
’
.
,
,
.
.
’
,
,
,
,
.
-
-
,
,
.
,
,
.
C O M PAR I S ON
B G IV
.
.
,
(
—
8 8 94
)
1 3— 1 6
The Germ ans repented o f their mad ness and the
next day sent am b assadors t o C aesar H e seems [ is seen ]
“
t o have thought thus :
I must drive these m en acro ss th e
river Rhine for th ey are gaining m ore [ o f ] influence in
Gaul than is safe f o r us t o allow I must do everything
rather th an b e defe a ted b y th ese German s I will seize
the chiefs who have dared to put th emselves into my
p ower [ o ffer them selves to me ] an d then I will attack t h e
town and put to death as many a s p ossi b le T h is will free
G a ul fro m fear o f the German s and will m ake the name
o f th e Ro m a n p eople secure for a l l ti m e to com e
remain
[
ing ]
After he h a d done th ese things h e hastened more
3
quickly than o n e would t h ink p ossi b le [ than th oug h t ] to
the enemy s ca m p This was defended more b ravely than
2
18 2
.
.
,
.
.
,
.
.
,
’
.
1 si
a
n
g
i nf er o
'
.
2
p
a en i t ct
.
3 o
i
n
i
o
p
'
.
C A ESAR
68
succ es sfully an d s om e threw them selves into th e Rhine
an d there p e rished But much th e larger p art were S lain
b y the Ro man c avalry
C aesar says that the Germans
1
tried t o deceive him b u t h e is himself accused of faith
les snes s even b y those wh o think h i m b etter in war than
any other Roman M ust we n ot always keep in mind
C
m
emo
ry
that
aesar
is
writing
of
concerning
his
o
w
n
[
]
[
]
?
deeds
Yes C aesar had n o w conquere d al l the Ger
m an s wh o had m ade war up on Gaul b u t thought that h e
ought t o cro ss th e river
,
.
.
,
,
.
.
,
RE LAT I ON S OF P LAC E
B G IV
.
.
17
,
—9 9
5
9
(
)
21
-
C ae sar
did n ot wish to cro s s the Rhi n e in the b oats
whic h the U b ii had p romised h i m and so with great quick
2
nes s he b uilt a b ridge o f rem arka b le strength By m ean s
H e did not
o f this h e led his army a cro s s into Germany
fight a b attl e f or the S uevi had withdrawn fro m their
territory to th e forests T hey had asse m b led in [ into ]
C aesar
o n e place an d there were awaiting the Roman s
3
h o wever determined not t o fight reckles sly an d soon
returned to Gaul and cu t down th e b ridge Thence he
hastened to s et ou t f or Britain from whic h country a u x i l i
aries had b een furnishe d his en emie s I t w a s going to b e
a great advantage to C aesar to fin d o u t a b out th e p eople
an d pl a ce s o f B ritain for n othing a b out th e m was kn own
at Rom e and he afterward s waged ma n y wars with them
H e could n o t fin d o u t anything fro m the merc hants (who m
h e ) summ on ed an d s o h e sen t Vol u s en u s with a S h ip o f
war to th e island M eanwhile he himself set o u t towards
18 3
.
,
.
.
,
.
.
,
,
,
.
,
.
,
.
,
,
.
1 a ccus
o
'
.
2
mi r u s
3
.
m ox
.
B G IV
.
.
2 2 —2 6
,
9
the M orini w h o immediately gave him ho stages Then
1
from all sides he b egan t o gather ships many o f wh ich he
had used in V en etia S o me o f th e Briton s sent am b assa
dors to C aesar w h o intrusted to them on e o f his men of
influenc e an d sent them h ome again
.
,
,
-
.
,
.
RELAT I ON S OF T I M E —
B G IV
.
Vol u s en u s
.
P H RA S E ( 100
BY
103 )
-
2 2— 2 6
,
C aesar h a d
sent forward five
days b efore h a d returned an d a l l w a s now ready For
several days C aesar awaited a favora b le wind H aving Ob
2
t a i n e d good weather he s et sail a b out midnight for Britain
Throughout this night the wind and tide continued [ were ]
favora b le and o n th e next d ay th e Roman s s a w the B rit
on s drawn up o n the hills an d S hore Th e Ro m an s re
mained h ere at anchor till late in the day [ much day ]
an d then proceeded to an op en shore seven miles away
At the same time the enemy sent their cavalry t hit h er
and s h ortly [ a little ] after followed with all their troops
They b ravely attacked the Ro m an s w h o were attempting
t o disem b ark; and a very fierc e b attle w a s fought
The
Rom an s h a d to do everything at th e sa m e time b u t C aesar
sent the w a r S hi p s to their aid a n d th e stan dard b earer o f
t h e tenth legion led them against th e enemy This m an
t h e soldiers followed
som e from on e shi p and others
from another E ncouraging o n e anot h er [ among th em
selv es ] t h ey approac h ed the s h ore a n d within a sh ort
time put their enem ies to flight
C a esar s c avalry h a d
not b een a b le to reac h th e island and s o he Could not
pursue the enemy very far [ long ]
18 4
.
,
w h om
,
,
.
.
'
,
.
,
.
.
,
.
,
.
,
-
,
.
,
.
,
,
’
“
.
,
.
2
t er t i a f er e mgz na
‘
'
.
CAE S AR
0
7
RELA T I ON S OF T I M E — D AT E S
B G IV 2 7 33
h
r ft r d t
ri
rd i ng t t h
1
04
1
0
6
(
)
-
-
.
.
H
e
[
ea
e
a e ea c
,
ex e c s e a c co
o
e
t
Ro m a fi m e h o d ]
had sailed from Gaul at m idnight o n th e
2 6 t h o f A ugu st
D isem b arking on th e 2 7 t h he fought
1
th e b attle o f whic h we h ave written a b ove an d th e enemy
withdrew fro m th e coast O n th e n ext day th rough a m
b a s s a d o r s th ey b egged C aesar for p eac e an d were p ar
d o n e d b y him
O n the 3 ot h they sent a p art o f the
h ostages which C ae sar had d emanded and on the 1 s t o f
S eptem b er all th e Briton s h ad returned t o th eir homes
and the islan d se em ed t o b e su b dued B ut o n the 10 t h
th ere oc curred a temp est wh ic h S hattered many o f the
Rom ans ship s and drove others over the deep to the
continent O n learning this th e chiefs b egan im mediately
to gath er tro ops and a few days later [ after ] attacked a
legion whi ch was fo ragin g C aesar kn ew th ey had some
2
new plan in mind f or hostages were n o longer s ent t o
him and s o h e had p repared f o r an attack A t the same
time h e h ad b e en repairin g his fl eet using wh at was o f use
fro m [ o f ] th e wrecked s h ip s And also h e w a s providing
grain f o r his s oldiers in c ase [ if ] he s h ould h ave to re main
in B ritain durin g the winter They n ow surrounded this
legion with their ch ario ts w hic h were o f great servic e to
them in b attle f o r th ey threw the Rom an s into confusion
18 5
.
C aesar
.
,
,
,
.
,
.
,
,
.
’
.
,
.
,
.
,
,
.
.
,
.
,
RELAT I ON S OF T I M E
B G IV
—
.
.
BY
C L A U SE
—
1
1
1
1
0
7
)
(
—
34 3 8
,
As soo n a s [ wh en first ] C aesar was informed o f
this attack he hasten ed t o t h e a s s i s t a n ce o f his men and
18 6
.
'
,
,
2
B G IV
.
.
,
I
7
8
4
3 3
-
the enemy soon withdrew After th e legio n h a d b een led
b ack in safety C aes a r kept the tro o p s in ca m p for s everal
days o n a ccount o f storms The B riton s i m p roved [ used ]
this tim e ( in ) b ringing togeth er larger forces than b efore
C aesar also had O b tained a few horsem en f o r in th e for
1
m er b attle as we know h e had b een una b le to p ursue
th e ene m y (after they were ) put to flight
While the
Britons were co ming the Ro man b attle lin e w a s b eing
drawn up and when th e b attle h ad b egun it m ade a
fierce attack up on th em The latter q uickly fled and th e
cavalry pursued th e fugitives [ fleeing ] until they reached
their town Th ey at once p romised host a ges and peace
was m ade with th em C aesar w a s waiting until he c ou l d
sail with his w eakened ship s and after a few d a ys o b tain
ing good weather h e s et o u t f o r Gaul with all his men
B ecause of h is victories in Britain and Gaul there was a
2
thanksgiving at Ro me
This acc ount tells o f C a esar s
3
first invasion o f Brit a in
I n the n ext b o ok we have a
b etter account o f the island its p eople and t h eir customs
.
,
.
.
,
,
,
.
,
,
,
,
.
,
.
,
.
,
,
,
.
’
.
.
,
,
USE AND SE QU EN C E
Ca es a r
’
s
OF
.
T E N SES ( 112
-
114)
R el a t i on s w i tb tb e Ger m a n s
When C aesar first came t o Gaul h e found (that )
the Germans had b een there b efore him The Gauls had
made use o f their aid in the c ontentions b etween the fac
tions o f their states b u t th ey h ad n ow f o r a long ti m e
b een repenting of this f o r t h e Ger m an s were a p eople of
gre a t p ower and wish ed to s eIz e the fields o f Gaul C aesar
first h a d to defeat Ariovistus on e o f the mo st p owerful
kings of the German s O f this war he writes in t h e first
t wi t h I d i
ti
i i w i th A
m m i
in
ti
18 7
.
,
.
,
,
.
,
.
1
a
n
ca
ve .
2
e
or
a
3
.
'
cu r s o
n
c c us a
v e.
C AE S AR
2
7
b ook
N ew b an ds h owever kept cro ssing the Rhin e
1
after A riovi stus had b een driven o u t ; f o r th e Gauls
wer e una b le to defend them selve s an d C aesar th e only
was su b duing re b ellion s
o n e o n who m they c ould rely
among th e B elgian s th e Veneti and the A quitan i
1
When th ese wars had b een b rought t o an end h e has
tened with great quickness toward the river Rh ine The
Tencteri with all their (b elon gings ) were wintering in th e
village s o f th e M orini ; b u t C aesar imm ediately crushed
t he m b y stratagem [ am b ush ]
T hen h e determin ed to
c arry th e war into Germany an d t o prevent m or e fro m
cro s sing [ to cro ss ] th e Rhine T herefore h e b uilt a b ridge
an d le d his army over b u t eightee n days after t hat h e
return ed to Gaul an d destroye d that (famous ) b ridge I n
th e sixth b ook he write s (that ) he went again t o Germany
an d tells o f so me strange things a b out wh ic h we know
b ett er
C A U S E ( 115 —118 )
.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
.
,
.
.
.
,
,
.
\
,
.
Tb e I n v a s i on
f
o
B r i ta i n
writes o f two In v a s Ion s of B ritain , on e o f
whic h w a s m ade imm ediately after he returned fro m Ger
many S ince h e kn ew nothing ab out the islan d h e s ent
2
in advance a lieutenant who was worthy o f h i s co n fid en ce
Throu gh fear so m e of th e B riton s sent h ostages t o him
u t fro m G aul h e left a garrison
O
n
setting
ecaus
e
b
o
( )
3
as
he
writes
he
wished
o have a s afe retreat
to
the
t
(
)
c ontinent
A fter a hard [ ke en ] fight h e forced h is
enemie s into the interior ; b u t b ecause o f the inj uries t o
his
fleet
the
B
riton
s
dared
to
attack
th
e
Ro
man
s
f
o
[ ]
While som e were rep airing th e ship s h e led th e rest
18 8
.
C aesar
,
.
.
.
,
,
.
.
,
1
E pr
x
es s
i n t w o w a ys
2
.
d
é
s
fi
3
.
t
as
p
r ece
.
74
C
A ES AR
wh ich th ey inten ded [ h ad in mind ] t o marc h For this
em b assy they ch o s e O r g et o r i x S in ce he h ad form ed a
co n spiracy fo r s eizing th e p ower h e gladly undertook this
1
H e was assiste d not only b y the n o b ility o f his own state
b u t b y two p owerful men am on g the S equani and the
A ed u i
I t w a s a ls o to h is advantage [ u s e] that [ b ecause ]
h e h ad m arried his daughter am ong the A e d u i O f his
2
p urp o se the H elvetia n s kn ew n othin g b u t were making
3
eve rything ready f o r their dep arture
.
.
,
.
,
.
.
,
.
P U RPO SE
BY C
L A USE ( 124—128 )
B G I
.
.
,
—8
4
19 0
Wh en the magistrates were inform ed thr o ugh o n e
o f their retainers o f this plot o f O r g et or i x they wis hed t o
b ring him t o trial th at the law m ight b e enforced
But
fe aring that h e could n ot e scap e an d th at th ey would b urn
him t o death h e com mitted suicide
Th e H elvetian s
4
neverth eless were waiting only until all th ings w er e
ready and o n M arc h 2 4 t h as so me s a y they s et fire
to th eir town s an d started toward th e Rh one At th is
tim e C aesar h ad f o r the fir s t time b een m ade pro con sul o f
Gaul and h e determined t o hinder them fro m p assing
through th e p rovin ce T h e H elvetian s sent th e n o b lest
of th eir rac e to him to ask th a t an o p po rtun ity of doing
this b e granted them But C aes ar wished (f o r ) more [ o f ]
time and ordere d them t o return to him on the 1 3 th of
April
Wh en th ey c am e t o a s k h i s p urp o se h e f o r
b ade their cro ssing [ th em t o cro ss ] the Rh on e ; and
when they attem p ted to d o this b y force h e e a sily r e
p ulsed them That h e might more easily overcome them
.
,
,
.
,
.
,
,
,
,
,
,
.
-
-
-
,
.
.
,
.
,
.
1
2
m én s
3
.
p fi
ro
ci i o
4
‘
.
ta n t n m
.
B
.
G 1, 9
.
-
5
13
he had meanwhile b rought together a s many troop s
po ssib le and had fortified many place s o n this side
the R h one
RES U LT ( 129 13 3 )
as
of
.
-
B G I
.
.
,
9
-
13
Th e H elvetians had b een so hindered b y C aesar
at the Rhone that th ey were crossing into Gaul b y the
only other way through the country o f th e S e q uanian s
D u m n or i x on e of those who had assisted O r g et o r i x
b rought it to pass th at th e S equanian s were n o longer
unwilling to allow the H elvetian s to make their w a y
through th e passes of the m ountain s S ince s o large a
multitude can n o t b e kept fro m doing harm it n ow hap
pened that the H elvetian s had laid waste the field s o f the
T h e latter immediately sent to C aesar to ask
A ed u a n s
f o r aid and a s they had f o r years b een friends o f Rome
til they h ad nothing left with
C aesar c ou l d not wait u n
which to resist C ae sar had gathered his force s and h a d
marched s o q uickly that within thirty days he was at
Geneva ready for b attle
When h e heard fro m th e
1
A ed u a n s of their wrongs h e did n ot h esit a te to go to
their assistance
B
eing
informed
through
sco
u ts
f
o
(
)
their line o f m arch he attacked th em so suddenly that
he crushed o n e canton and the others sent am b assadors
to him
19 1
.
.
,
,
,
.
,
.
,
,
,
.
.
,
.
,
,
.
C
OND I T I ON S
—
SI MP L E S TAT E M EN T
B G I
.
.
,
—13 7
1
34
(
)
1 4— 1 8
E ven if C aesar felt [ was ] con scious o f a n y outrage
o f the H elvetian s b ecause t h e Romans h ad
at
the
hands
(
)
19 2
.
‘
1
(124627 5
.
6
7
CA ES A R
1
b een
d efeated b y trickery m any years b efore h e b lamed
th em more for th eir recent deeds I f pro sp erity is some
2
times granted to the wicked it often re sults that th ey
grieve m ore w hen the c hange com es An d C aesar made
s o m e such reply [ replied so me suc h things ] to the H el
3
v et i a n s
when t hey b oasted o f their former victories
“
Th ey h owever said : I f y o u do n ot make p eac e with us
w e will b ring up on you the sam e calamitie s as [ which ]
we b rought up on C assius
C aesar w a s indignant at t h e
words [ sp eech ] o f t h e am b as s adors b u t n evertheless
“
made an swe r : I f you give m e ho stages s o th at I may
h av e so me control over [ p ower o f ] your deeds I will do
4
as y o u wish
But this th ey refused O n t h e n ext day
they defeate d a m uc h larger force of C aesar s cavalry
wh ich gave th em greater hop e M eanwhil e C aesar (wh o
kept ) followin g could n o t o b tain grain for his soldiers
“
H e said to the A ed u a n s : I f you wish o u r aid in this war
furnis h us grain
I t h ap pened that D u mn or i x w a s usi ng
his influenc e t o defeat C aesar and to keep his o w n plac e
am ong th e A ed u a n s All this w a s discover ed b y C aesar
w h o had c ommande d L i s cu s to tell him all
,
.
,
.
.
.
,
.
,
,
”
.
.
’
,
.
,
.
,
,
”
.
,
,
.
.
C
ON D IT I ON S — PO SSI B L E AND
B G I
.
.
C
,
ONT RARY T O FACT ( 13 8
1 9 —2
-
14 1)
5
feared that th e influenc e o f D u mn or i x
would b ec ome o f so great (weight ) am ong the G auls th at
D i v i t i a c u s would b e driven o u t
B ut a t th e exhortation
o f t h e latter that
D u m n or i x b e sp ared C aesar m erely
5
warned him to do b etter I f to day you and I were in
suc h danger we should have great fear b u t if w e shoul d
19 3
.
C aesar
.
,
-
.
,
,
1
d ol u s
n
l
i
u
( p
ral )
.
3
U se pa
rt i
ci p l e
4
.
‘
r ecfis o
.
5
noa i é
'
’
.
B G I
.
.
,
2 6—3 0
77
?1
scape s o easily should we n o t b e glad
C aes ar h ad
2
planned t o attack th e ene m y the n ext day T o gain the
victory m ore easily he sent L a b i en u s ahead to seize a
mountain
I f w e c ould (possi b ly ) attack the enemy
we should defeat them
Afterwards
a t the sam e time
he s en t C o n s i d i u s to in form him o f L a b i en u s I f C on
s i di u s h ad not b een terrified the en e m y would h ave b een
defeated at once b u t he rep orted what w a s n ot true
E ven then victory would h ave b een gained had not
C aesar fe a red th a t L a b i en u s w a s c u t o ff b y the enemy
Late in the day it h app ened that the truth was discovered
b u t the H el v et l a n s h ad moved o n
C aesar could n ot
follow farther for his men had n o fo od I f th e enemy
had proc eeded th ey could h ave reached [ co me through to ]
Aquitania b efore C aesar c ould p ursue B ut they turn ed
from their way and a ttacked the Rom ans (w h o were ) in
b attle lin e b oth half w ay up and o n the top o f a hill
e
,
.
,
.
”
.
,
'
.
,
,
.
,
.
,
.
.
,
,
.
.
C
ON C ESSI ON AND PRO VIS O (
B G I 2 6—30
.
.
—
142 14 5
)
,
Alth ough the H elvetian s fought with great valo r
th ey (were ) defeated (and ) with drew to a hill n e a r b y
C aesar s soldiers followed s o fiercely th at they gain ed
p ossession o f t h e ca m p
The H elvetian s had to le ave
3
a l l and
depart b y night towards th e n orth
E ven if
C aesar del ayed a few days he nevertheless prevented the
n eigh b ors from assisting the enemy with fo od
The r e
sult w a s that th e H elvetians soon after this came t o him
to b eg for peace
Though they had b een his enemie s
1
he determined t o spare them provided th at they would
19 4
,
.
.
’
.
.
,
.
,
.
,
‘
,
1
l a ct a s
.
2 a di
p
‘
z s cor
.
3 se
1
'
t
t
r
fi
n
e
z
n
é
s
p
‘
.
Fi rs t p eri phr s t i
a
j
c c o n ug a
ti
on
.
8
7
C
A ES AR
o b ey h is orders
H e wished t o mak e u s e of them f or
their c o untry was now vacant and he feared the German s
would s eize it A c cordingly h e ordered the H elvetians
to return h o m e and t o r eb ui ld the vi l lage s (they h ad )
b urned
Th ey had gone from H elveti a b ecause (a s they
said ) their territories were s o limited D o y o u rem em b er
O r g et or i x th e leader in [ o f ] this movem ent [ thing ] ?
N o w h owever there was en ough land f or from a b out
th ere were left only
The num b er of
th ose killed in th is s hort war was s o great th at we wonder
S om e o f th e G auls cam e t o ask C ae sar f or a c ouncil and
although h e had n o p ower ov er them h e app ointed a day
f o r this c ouncil of all Gaul
.
,
,
.
.
.
,
,
,
,
.
,
,
,
.
I N D I R E CT D IS CO U R SE — D E C LARAT IVE SE NT E N C ES
B G I
.
.
19 5
.
Write
A
3
,
—
1
1
4
5
0
6
)
(
—
1
34
in in direct discourse dep ending
,
o n l eg at i
'
'
d i x ér u n t
A
I n c omm on c ouncil we h ave d ecided to seek aid
.
from y ou
B ut y ou must n ot disclose what We shall
say of th e German s f o r th ey will inflict torture s upon
1
T h ey first cam e hither to b ear a i d to the A verni
us
and then they s ettled in th e lan d o f the S equanian s
whic h i s m uc h b etter than their ow n The A ed u a n s h ave
always b een your allies and y ou must conquer their en e
m ies b ecause th ey intend t o d o what th e C im b ri did
2
many years a g o [ b efore ]
Therefore y ou will b en efit
yourself n o less than Gaul A riovistus is their king and h e
r this reason w e shall
longer
endura
le
h
s
n
o
b
F
w
o
i
o
[
]
dep art from o u r h om es
.
,
,
.
,
.
,
,
.
-
,
.
.
.
2
p
'
r os u
m
.
B
G
.
.
I
—
,
79
3 5 39
replied that h e would send a messenger t o
1
Ariovistu s t o b eg h im t o co m e to a conference ; that he
had hopes that the king would do what he asked [ s ho uld
have asked ] When a m b a ss a dors were sent to A riovistus
the latter s a id that h e would n o t hold a conference with
B esides he
C aesar and did not dare to trust the Ro m ans
s a id that h e did not con sider [ think ] th a t C aesar had any
2
b usiness in Gaul outside of the Ro man province
B
C aesar
.
,
.
.
,
.
.
I ND I R E CT D IS CO U R SE
SE NT E N C ES
G I, 3 5 3 9
B
19 6
Write
.
r
A i ov i s
tu s
r es
p
— 15 2
1
1
5
)
(
-
A
in indirect
ond
it
d iscourse ,
depending upo n
I f I were seeking any favor [ thing ] o f you I would
co m e to y o u But I neither c a n do this n or do I promise
to return the hostages to the A ed u a n s I f they had n ot
3
made w a r o n me I sho u ld n ot have inj ured the m S ince
they h a ve done so and were defeated they n o w p ay tri b ute
to me
Y o u did me a kindness at Rome when through
your efforts [ y ou ] I was rec ognized [ called ] as a king
I f h owever I shall b e [ s hall have b een ] hindered b y y ou
4
in my rights my former friendship will n ot b enefit you
I f my m en were not invincib le they would h ave b een
conquered b y the Gauls
Therefor e I d o n ot fear the
Romans more than my former enemies
A
.
,
.
.
.
,
,
.
.
,
,
,
.
,
.
.
B
C aes ar
was informed that the Germans would take
Ve s o n t i o if he did n ot b ear relief [ a i d ]
H e thought he
ought not a b andon to th e ene m y so gre a t a sup p ly o f arms
and hastened b y forced marches to the town of Ves o n t i o
I t w a s said that the Germans would easily defeat the
.
.
.
1
126
2
.
"
ex tr a
.
3 n c o
o e
‘
.
4 v et ns
.
80
C
A ES A R
Roman s if a b attle s hould b e fought for t h e former were
men o f greater stature than th e latter
T h e army w as
greatly disturb ed b y th e rep orts [ words ] and they s a y th at
the camp would h ave b een a b andoned and th e Romans
would h a ve gone ho me had n ot s o m e b e en held by (feelings
o f sh ame
)
,
.
,
.
,
.
I ND I R EC T D I S CO U R S E —
UES
T
I
ON
S
AND
Q
B G I
.
19 7
.
m i t t ed
.
,
C O M MAN D S ( 15 3
15 5
-
)
— 6
0
4 4
Wh en som e b egged p ermission [ that it b e p er
th em ] t o return to Ro me C aesar addre ssed his
,
o fficers : (P a t i n fo i n d i rect d i s cou r s e )
?
W hat do I hear
That Rom ans are afraid ? I f any
o n e d esires to l eave m e let him go
M any tim es already
1
o u r fathers have m et
th ese G erman s and h ave defeated
?
them Why sh ould n ot we
I ndeed I b elieve A riovistus
will refuse to fight us D o not fear th e scarcity o f grain
and th e long roads Am I not lo oking o u t for the s u p
?
plie s
As t o t he roads you can s oon j udge f or this night
I sh all advanc e T he tenth legion will b e fait h ful to m e
an d with it alon e I will m eet thes e German s N ow return
to your l egions an d let th e b rave p repare to follow m e
A few days after this C aesar in a conference with A rio
tried to show him how muc h advantage [ good ]
vistu s
Ro me h ad b ee n to him and what he ought t o d o f or her
Ariovistu s told C aesar why h e su spected that his friend
ship w a s pretended a n d h ow h e could gain true frien ds
at Ro me if h e should kill C aesar C aesar writes th at then
A riovistu s ordered his cavalry to attack the Ro man s and
that thus th e c onference was b roken o ff
.
-
.
,
.
,
.
.
,
,
.
,
.
.
,
,
,
,
.
,
.
,
.
1 occu r r fi
.
E X E R C IS E S
N E PO S
b y h p h e n s a r e t o b e t fa n s l a t ed b y a s i n g l e w o d ,
o ds i n
i n com m a n d of
o un d b a c e s a r e t o b e o mi
ed i n
a e b a c e t s i n d i ca e t h e
u
a in
en d e i n
i g u es i n h ea v
q
g
W o rd s
t
y
W r
c o nn ec ed
-
-
r k
ti n
r
S
to the
s ec
o
s of
the
r
t
r k t
L t r
r
F r
ti
S
C ti n p
r
tt
.
I tr
n
o d uc
on
.
ee
au
o
,
53
.
e
.
g
w er e
.
tr l t i n
y ty p r f r
ans a
e
o
.
e e
.
ARRANG E M E N T OF T H E SE NT E N C E ( 1—6)
M I LT I A DES I—II
19 9
M iltiades who was very e min ent at A then s w a s
2
s ent to th e C h er s o n es u s b y the Athen ian s Th ey selected
him ( in accordance with ) th e reply o f th e Pythia ; for th ey
3
had sent m en t o D elph i to con sult th e god an d he h a d
M ilti a des
b idden t hem tak e M iltiades ( as ) their leader
4
then set ou t for Le mn o s w hic h island h e tried to b ring
under th e protection of th e Athenian s As the inh a b it
5
ants laughed at (him ) an d h e had n o time to delay [ of
del aying ] h e d eparted to th e C h er s o n es u s M any (of
2
th e ) Ath enian s h ad s et out with him fro m Ath ens
With
th es e h e so on routed th e b arb arian s an d gain ed p ossession
6
of th e w hol e country A fter h e had s ettled the colonists
7
h ere h e again went to Lemn os Th e inha b itants n ot
darin g to resist yielded to h i m Th e oth er islands were
th en b rought under A th enian rule
1
,
.
,
.
,
.
,
.
,
,
.
.
.
.
,
,
.
,
.
SI MP L E A G R EE M EN T S ( 7
M I LT I AD ES I II—IV
-
10)
M iltiades and th e Greek ch iefs wh o had followed
King D arius fro m Asia were left ( as ) guardian s o f the
200
,
.
,
1
97
2
.
96
3
.
124
4
.
5
117
6
.
108
7 r zi r s u s
'
.
.
M I LT I AD ES
IV—VI
83
over [ in ] th e D a n u b e [ river ] By t h is b ridge D ariu s
had led his tr 0 0 p s across the river and w a s m a king w a r
up on th e S cythi a n s M essages were soon b rought to the
1
guards of th e b ridge (that ) the S cythi a n s were pressing
2
D arius h ard
I m mediately M iltiades said to t h e other
“
guards : We will c u t down this b ridge and le a ve D arius
and his army across th e river
There t h ey will p erish
3
within a few days We will th en free Greece (fro m ) Per
sian rule
Th e other Greek leaders shr u nk from this
plan f or their ow n p ower depended up on the sovereignty
4
s o m a ny p rivy (to his plan
A
s
there
w
ere
o f D arius
(
)
)
M iltiades did n ot dare remain in Thrac e b u t s et o u t fro m
th e C her s o n es u s for Athens
D arius returned safely from E urop e an d after prep a r
4
5
in g a large fleet sent it to su b due Greece ; fo r h i s friends
1
told him that the Ath eni a n s were his enemies This fleet
was first b rought to E u b o ea This [ whic h ] was quickly
taken and all its inha b itants were s ent to the king
b rid ge
.
,
.
.
.
.
.
,
.
,
.
,
.
.
.
,
P E R I PHRA ST I C
ONJ U GAT I ON S T E N SES ( l l —15 )
—
M I LT I AD ES IV VI
C
.
D arius inte nded to su b du e Greece an d alleged (as )
an excuse (th at ) th e Ath e n ian s h ad given aid to th e I on i a n s
Th e Athenian s (were ) greatly disturb ed b y th e a p proac h
o f th e Persi a n s
a c ed a e m o
and
sought
aid
of
from
the
L
[
]
(
)
ni a ns
While a m es senger w a s going to Lacedaemon th ey
h ad t o c hoo se ten ge n era l s These m en were i n comman d
o f th e ar m y and h a d to decide where they ought to fight
S o m e wished to defend t h e city ; others t o m eet t h e
enemy o n the b attlefield [ in b attle line ] even with t h eir
201
.
,
.
.
,
-
-
.
.
,
,
1
14 7
2 s
ta t i m.
3
100
.
4
22
.
5
124
.
N E PO S
84
s mall forc es The Lacedae moni a n s could not aid [ s end aid
1
to ] the m a t this ti m e and s o the Pl a t a e a n s ( were the ) only
on
es
w
h
o
assisted
them
Yet
M
iltiade
s led forth the
(
)
troop s o f the Athenians and p itch ed ca mp in a sp ot where
—
th e tree s were scattered h ere an d there I n this w a y he
2
thought he would hinder the Persian cavalry
Wh en
D atis th e Persi a n le a der s a w that th ey were eager to
fight he imm ediately j oined b attle b u t routed by th e
valor of the A thenians h e had t o retire t o [ seek ] his sh ip s
A s a reward f o r this victory th e Athenian s p lac ed th e p or
trait o f M il t iades first amon g their generals For th e b attle
3
w a s p a 1nted in the Poecile at th eir c ommand
o f M aratho n
.
,
.
,
-
-
.
.
'
-
,
,
,
,
,
-
-
,
.
.
-
.
USES O F T H E I NF I N IT IVE
—
1
0
2
6
(
)
M I LT I AD ES VII—VII I
T he Persian h ad withdrawn from Greece b u t was
still ab le to h o l d many islands T h es e [ which ] the A t h e
n i a n s wished to take vengeanc e up on [ p ursue with war ]
b ecaus e they h ad a ided the Persian with their fleets There
4
fore th ey put M ilti a des in charge o f their forces When
5
h e h ad c omp elled many to return to th eir allegian ce h e
c am e to Paros This [ which ] islan d he could n ot win over
b y p ersuasion [ S peec h ] for the Parian s thought that t h e
6
Persian fleet would supp ort them Accordingly M ilti a des
b esieged th e city an d w a s o n th e p oint o f c a pturing it
wh en a grove in th e distance ac cidenta l ly c a ught fire Both
w
a s ap p roaching
parties
thought
that
th
e
royal
fleet
and
(
)
M iltiades b urning his vi n eae a n d testudo returned h om e
un successful The A thenian s th o ught that h e h ad b een
c orrupted b y th e king a n d fi ned h im he a vily [ punished
1
2
V t t
S
109
IV t t
l
S
147 15 0
65
202
,
.
.
,
.
.
,
-
.
,
.
,
,
.
,
,
.
,
3
‘
so us
.
,
.
4
.
ec
.
,
ex
3
5
.
.
ec
.
,
ex
.
T H E M IS T O CL ES
I V
85
-
him b y a large fine] This money was n ot paid b y M il t i a
des a n d he died in prison from the wounds [ which ] he had
received near P a ro s The Athenian s h ad pun ished M i lt i a
d es not b ecause of this c harge b u t b ec ause his power
1
seemed [to b e] to o great Besides th ey feared h e would
b e a tyrant
.
,
.
,
,
,
.
.
AB LAT IVE AB S O LU T E ( 21
T H E M IST O C L ES I—V
203
3
I n the re 1gn
of Xerxes the Persian s sent a very
l arge fleet a n d army again st Greece b u t these were de
feated b y the foresight o f o n e (man ) Fo r at A then s l ived
Themisto cles who ( when ) disi n herited b y h is father had
devoted himself to (the interests o f ) th e state This (man )
was very skillful in naval warfare an d b y his advice th e
Athenians h ad b uilt a fleet with the state mon ey When
the a pp roac h of Xerxes was kn own th e Ath enian s asked
4
the g o d how th ey S hould protect them selves When h e
“
had re p lied : By wooden walls Themistocles declared
“
h
that
th
e
ship
s
were
th
e
wo
oden
walls
S
o
the
A
t
e
(
)
5
to E u b oea with th eir
n i a n s a b and o ning th e city hastened
fleet of two hundred s hi p s (Although ) they defeated the
b ar b ari a n s here they withdrew b ecaus e the Persian s had
captured Thermo p ylae The allies o f the Athenians wished
to return (to ) their homes when th ey saw Athen s destroyed
6
B ut Themistocles comp elled them to fight a t
b y fire
Fo r sending a messenger to the king he per
S a l a mis
7
O n doing
d him to attack t h e Greeks i m medi a tely
su ade
this h e was con q uered b y t h e fleet of Greec e Fearing a
greater disaster the king then returned to [ into ] A sia
.
,
.
'
,
,
,
.
,
.
,
.
,
”
,
,
.
,
.
,
.
.
,
,
.
.
.
,
1
127
2
.
U s e th e
3 r e no r é nd r e
g
g ,
.
Ab l t i
a
4
"
ua
q
ve
Ab
t
s ol u e
m oa é, 15 3
r
whe
5
’
.
e
i t i s p os s ibl e
md t z i r a
'
.
5
.
p
a
’
ua
.
7
126
.
N E PO S
86
U
E
S
T
I
ON
S
AND
AN
S
W
E
R
S
Q
( 25
3 1)
-
T H E M ISTOC LE S VI —X
Was Th emistocles les s great in (tim e o f ) peace ?
N o f o r h e esta b lished th e triple har b or of the Piraeus and
fortified it b y walls D id h e not surround the city itself
?
with walls
When h e tried
C ertainly b u t n o t at first
t o restore th e wall s Of th e city th e Lac edae monians for
H ow did they re b uild the m
b ade th e A th enians to d o it
1
?
then
Themistocle s went to Lacedaem on and delayed
2
matters [things ] until th e walls were b uilt su fficiently h igh
This he learned fro m h i s colleagues wh o had n ow com e to
?
S parta
Did th e S p artan s hear (of ) this
Yes b u t th ey
hum ored Themisto cles an d sent three legates h olding the
highest position t o investigate [ the th ing ] With them
went the other A thenian s (b u t ) n ot Themisto cles Why
did n ot h e return als o
Th e Lacedaemonian s h eld him a s
a ho stage ; b u t when th eir o w n am b assadors arrived at
Athen s th ey were n ot allowed to go until Themistocle s h ad
2
3
S everal years later h e had t o flee fo r
b een sent h ome
safety to Asia b ecause h e was accused o f treason King
Artaxerxes gave him m any gifts for h e h o p ed b y his
4
c oun sel t o cru sh Greece But T hemistocle s died at M ag
n es i a and was b ur i ed n ear the c ity
204
.
,
,
.
,
.
,
.
.
,
.
,
,
,
,
.
.
,
.
.
,
'
,
.
.
O BJ E CT
CA
SES
—
1
A C C US AT IVE
.
2
3
9
3
)
(
-
AR IST I D ES AN D PA US AN I A S
Th e A th enians called Aristides the J ust b ecause
h e w a s s o upright [ of s o great integrity ] When he was
b eing exiled h e asked a man why h e d es n ed to b anish
205
’
‘
,
.
.
,
1
t a n d em
2
.
111
.
3 a l i u ot
q
4
.
F ut r I n fini t i
u e
ve
Of
I
u di
r Di
.
sc
.
148
.
AR IST I D ES PAUS AN I A S
,
,
C
I MON
87
Aristides H e [ th a t o n e] replied : B ecause all call him the
J ust
Yet this s a me integrity g a ve At h en s the supremacy
Of the s ea Fo r when Pausanias w a s conducting h imself
t o o arrogantly at Byzantium t h e Greek st a te s j oined th e
Ath enian alli a nce and c h os e Aristides as their leader
Pausanias h ad b ecome too elated b y his victory at P l a tae a
When the golden trip od w a s s et up at D elp hi b ec a use o f
this victory h e had written o n (it ) th at he himself h ad de
feated t h e Persians This in scription w a s cu t o u t b y the
1
S p a rtans Later at Byzantium as has b een stated a b ove
h e conducted himself arrogantly and al m ost demanded
royal h on ors of th e allies For this [which ] h e w a s called
home by the ephors and fined Returning [ when h e h ad
returned ] (t o ) Byzantium o f his own accor d h e wrote
letters to th e Persian king in whic h he promised to s u b
due Greec e for him a n d expressed the ho p e [ hoped ] that
he would give him his daughter When this was learned
w
a gain rec alled to S p arta
he
and
as
w
a s imprisoned
(
(
)
)
b u t l a ter h e was set free b ec a use h e could n ot b e convicted
The e p hors then asked a f a vor of a cert a in A r g i l i u s a
trusted sl a ve of P a usanias This man b etrayed Pausanias
to the ephors b u t he esc a p ed to a temple The doors Of
this [ Of which ] (temple ) were then walled up and here
perished in disgrace th e con q ueror of Plataea
.
.
.
,
.
,
.
,
.
,
,
.
,
,
.
.
,
,
,
.
,
,
,
.
,
.
,
.
,
.
OBJ EC T C A SES —
G EN I T IVE (40 4 5 )
C I MON
2
.
-
D o you remem b er the h ard fate of C imon ? A c
cording t o Athenian laws he w a s detain ed in the pu b lic
p rison b ecause a l a rge s u m o f [ much ] m oney h i s father s
206
.
’
,
,
N E PO S
3
fi ne h ad n ot b een p aid We pity this illustrious s on of
M iltiades b u t re mem b er th e great love o f h is S ister When
th e wealthy b u t igno b l e C a lli a s wish ed to marry h er s h e
2
declared th at s h e would m a r r y h i m when he h a d p aid
O n b ein g thu s freed C im on quickly b e came
C i m o n s fine
p owerful with th e army which under his c ommand [ he
b eing leader ] defeated his country s enemies an d captured
gre a t sp oils With th es e h e adorned t h e Acrop olis o f
Ath en s b u t b ecause o f his gre at p owe r was s oon exiled
Wh en th e Lacedae monian s
b y h is ungratefu l citizen s
declared w ar on A then s they repented o f their j ealousy
of C imon A fter his recall [ h aving b een recalled ] h e did
n o t keep in mind th e deed of h is fellow citizen s b u t strove
to restore p eace b etween A then s an d S parta After this
had b een gained h aving gon e to C yprus he h ad su b dued
th e larger part of th e islan d wh en h e d ied Of disease
A th en s had n ever h ad a m an o f such li b erality
E very
A th en ian enj oyed his garden and its fruit
H is property
his services did n ot fail any wh o n eeded his help For a
long tim e A th en s m ourn ed h i s los s [ m issed him ]
1
,
.
,
.
,
’
.
,
,
’
.
,
.
,
.
-
,
.
,
.
,
.
.
,
.
,
.
OB J E CT
—
A
SES
C
3
D AT IVE (46 —5 1)
.
LYS AN D E R
Lysander won his reputation rath er b ecause o f
t h e in su b ordin ation o f th e A thenia n s th an b ecause of his
ow n valor ; f o r th ey h ad not b een o b edien t to their co m
3
m ander b u t had left t he fleet un gu a rded
E asily getting
p osse ssion of th is fleet Lys a nder w a s greatly pu ffed up
b y h is victory an d strove to h old all Greece in his p ower
B anishing all the en e m ies o f S parta from th e states of
207
.
.
,
,
.
,
2
n u bo
.
3
i na n i s
'
.
N E PO S
o
g
an investigatio n while h e w a s present [ h e b eing pr esent ]
T h ey co uld n ot inj ure h i m at th at ti m e an d s o re mained
S ilent until he h a d reach ed S icily
T hen they accuse d
h im of sac rilege [ b ec a us e h e h a d profaned th e s acred
rite s ] and h e was o rdered h o me [ th at he S ho uld return
h o m e ] for trial
F earing that his fellow citizen s were
e strange d fro m him h e fled to Lacedae mon wh ere b y his
talents h e aided th e Laced a e m onian s H e w a s s o S hrewd
in c o un sel that the Lacedaem onian s sought to kill him for
th ey feared t h at h e wou ld b e re sto red to favor with th e
Ath enian s Alci b iades perceived this and withdrew from
S parta to T i s s a p h er n es
S h ortly after h e returned to
Ath en s h aving won such victories that Lacedaemon
b egged f o r p eace
.
,
.
.
,
-
.
,
,
.
,
.
,
.
,
.
PA SSIVES ( 5 8 6 2)
A L C I B I AD ES VI—X I
-
The A th enian s had b een p ersuaded that they had
su ffered adversity [ adverse things had happ ened to them ]
Yet
b ecause A lci b iades h ad b een b anish ed b y the m
1
alth ough th ey flock ed to the Piraeu s to s ee him and
alth ough laurel wreaths were b e s towed o n him b y th e
2
state as up on an O ly m pic victor he S oon fell ag a in into
disf a vor when h e failed t o [ did n ot] take C y m e After
h e learn ed th at th ey had put an oth er in his stead he
withdrew to Thrace where h e gath ered an army and
enrich ed him self b y plun der H ere he S h owed his love
of country ; f or wh en Lys an der the S part a n w a s pro
tracting the w a r in order th at h e might exhau st th e r e
s ources o f t h e At h enian s Alci b iades cam e to P h i l o cl es
3
and promised t o drive Lys a n der from Thrac e o r to force
209
.
.
,
,
‘
,
,
-
.
,
,
,
.
,
,
,
,
1
14 2
.
3
F ut re I n fini t i
u
v e,
148
.
T H RA S YB U L US
I
P h i l o c l e s h owever not onl y w a s
him to m ake p eace
unwilling to do wh at Alci b iades urged b u t even gave
Lysander a chance to destroy his ar m y Alci b iades after
losing a l l h i s possession s fled to the s atrap Ph a r n a b a z u s
At first P h a r n a b a z u s rec eived h i m kindly b u t afterw a r d s
when the Lacedae m on i a ns de m anded that Alci b i a des
should b e killed ordered his men to slay him They tried
at first t o accomplish this b y setting fire to h i s house [ hi s
house having b een fired ] ; b u t as h e w a s on th e point o f
escaping fro m the flames they had t o slay him with mis
S iles
PO SSESSI ON (6 3 —6 7 )
,
.
,
,
.
,
,
,
.
,
,
.
,
.
T H RA S YB U LUS
som e reason m a ny ( m en ) w h o have b een very
valiant and h ave freed their c ountry from tyr a nts h ave
1
not gained gre a t renown a m ong their (people )
So
Thrasy b ulus excelled a l l in merit b u t others p rofited b y
his deeds [ made his deeds o f profit ]
Thrasy b ulus h ad
however the special g l ory of d riving o u t t h e thirty tyrants
When h e h ad (b u t ) t h irty men with him th e tyrants d e
s p i s e d h im ; b u t therein lay his s a fety [ this w a s to him
for safety ] For he increased his forces while th ey were
slow in p ursuing him
L a ter he seized M unychia and
killed C r i t i a s the chief o f his ene m ies who with his (m en )
had assaulted his position When the fo rces of C r i t i a s
were withdr a wing to th e city Thras y bulus s p a red a l l ex
c ept the tyrants t h e m selves
These were p unis h ed b y
exile an d t h eir good s were confisc a ted All ot h ers w h o
had not b een (associated ) with them in the cit y were not
2
p unished for t h eir p revious m isdeeds The law o f a m nesty
210
.
Fo r
,
,
.
,
.
,
,
.
,
.
.
,
,
,
.
,
.
,
.
,
,
.
1 con s e
or
u
q
2
.
43
.
N E PO S
2
9
was th e special m erit o f T hrasy b ulus I n recognition of
f
r
o
his
s
ervices
the
peo
ple
gave
him
a
crown
Oliv
f
o
e
[ ]
W ith this s mall gift he was content and escaped
b ranche s
the envy o f his fellow citizens W hile h e was waging w a r
in C ilicia as a general the b a r b arian s sallied forth fro m
their town and killed him
.
,
.
,
-
.
'
,
.
D ES R I PT I ON
C
P H RA SE (
C ONON
— BY
—
68 7 5
)
211
I n her misfortune Athen s had a general o f gre at
skill and c arefulne ss I ndeed wh en Lysan der h ad c o n
quered the A thenian fleet at Aego spotami and the S p ar
.
.
,
,
tans were a b out t o b esiege Ath ens C o non sought every
f
r
mean
s
which
h
e
might
protect
a
defen
se
to
b
b
e
o
) y
(
[
]
h is c ountry As at this tim e T i s s a p h er n es the royal satrap
h ad formed a league with th e ene mie s o f Ath en s C onon
sought aid o f P h a r n a b a z u s wh o was n ot only a satr a p
H e was a m an o f great
b u t a s on i n law o f the king
j udgment and ap pointed C on on general of his forces
When A g es i l a u s o n the overthrow o f Athen s attempted
to wrest A sia from th e Persian b y th e aid o f T i s s a p h er n es
C onon o pposed h im until th e Athenian s declared war o n
the Lac edaemonian s At this tim e Artaxerxes the great
king did not kn ow that T i s s a p h er n es had revolted from
him But o n th e departure o f A g es il a u s Ph a r n a b a z u s i
sent C on on to th e kin g to accus e T i s s a p h er n es Wh en
C onon h ad com e he with great prudence h a n ded to the
chiliarch in writing [ written ] wh at h e had intended to
n
sa
to
th
e
king
f
r
every
w
h
cam
e
to
the
ki
g
s
o
n
e
o
o
;
y
presence had to reverence him
This according to th e
1
cu stom s o f fre e Greec e h e cOu l d n ot do
O n reading
,
.
,
,
,
,
-
-
.
.
,
,
,
,
.
,
,
.
,
.
,
,
,
,
,
’
.
,
.
,
1
C ONON D I ON
,
I—IV
93
these letters th e king declared w a r on T i s s a p h er n e s and
the Lacedaemonians ; and also ordered war galleys fro m
the mariti m e states C onon was put in command of these
and soon routed the ene my
By this victory h e freed
Athen s and all Greece fro m S p artan rule
A fterward s
he w a s imprisoned b ecause he tried to b ring I onia again
under A thenian rul e
,
.
,
.
.
,
.
D ES C R I P TI ON — BY C L AUSE
D I ON I—IV
—
6
9
7
7
(
)
D ion o f S yracus e w a s connected with b oth the Dio
By nature h e was o f a kindly disposition and disliked
ny s i
t h e cruelty o f th e elder Dionysu s ; b u t b ecause o f h i s rela
What riches
t i o n s h i p h e remained [ was ] intimate with him
his father had left him were increased b y Dionysus w ho
h a d also given him his o w n daughter in marriage
What
ever Dionysus wished done was faithfully executed b y
D ion I n this way D ion w a s a b l e to soften the cruelty Of
the elder D ionysus b y his o w n kindness
D ionysus i n
deed humored him and even b rought over t o S yracuse
Plato w h o w a s th en at Tarentum When Plato later
displeased h i m Dionysus influen ced b y D i on s prayers
did n ot sell him (as a S lave ) W hen D ionysus was s eri
ousl
n gdom ; f or
sick
D
ion
wished
him
to
divide
his
ki
y
h e desired his sister s son s to h ave a sh are The p hysi
ci a n s
wh o re p orted this to th e younger Dionysus were
c ompelled to give the sick m a n a sleepin g p otion This
act [thing ] w a s th e cau se of t h e hatred b etween Dion an d
D ionysus the Younger
At first the latter p retended
friendship ; b u t when he fe a red that th e p eo ple would
cru s h him b ec a use th ey loved D io n and he himse l f was
not worthy to b e loved he sent Dion to Greece with all his
212
.
,
.
.
,
.
.
.
,
.
,
,
,
’
,
,
,
.
,
’
.
,
,
.
.
,
,
N E PO S
94
’
go ods T hen h e gave D ion s wif e in marriage to an other
an d gratified th e b ase st desires o f the S On
M eanwhile
D io n b egan t o p rep are tro op s in the Pelop onne s us
.
,
.
.
M E AN S AND AG E N CY
D I ON
—84
80
(
)
V X
-
With (b u t ) t w o ship s D ion attacked S icily an d
overthre w th e tyr a nny o f D io nysus within three days
H e was assisted b y H er a cl i d es w h o h ad b een exp elled by
D ionysus Wh en D io n h a d rec overed his wife a faction
was organized again st him b y the s a me H er a cl i d es wh o
c ould not c almly endure th e p o w er of Dion By m ean s
o f his soldiers D ion had H e r a c l i d e s killed and th en divided
among them the m on ey whic h he took fro m h is op p o
When this failed him an d h e could n ot app ease
n en t s
th e soldiers exc ept b y m ore m on ey h e lost (th e favor O f )
th e O ptim ates Then th e p eople b egan t o call h im tyrant
sinc e h e could n o longer retain the favor o f th e soldiers
At this time a S hrewd Greek C allicrates wh o th ought
all were ho stile to D ion form ed a con spiracy ag a inst
him
H e pretended to b e D ion s frien d and disclosed
to him his plan (saying ) th at b y his h el p D ion w ould dis
c over his enemies Wh en th e truth [ th ing ] w a s almo st
revealed b y Dion s sister an d wife C allicrates hasten ed to
S lay him
This h e ac co m plished b y m eans o f s o m e youths
o f great strength w h o b oun d D ion and killed him with a
sword [ killed with a sword D ion b ound ] T h e S y racusan s
were greatly dis p leased at their deed an d b uried D ion a t the
expense o f th e state H e w a s c a lled b y them t h e Li b er a tor
o f his C ountry b ecause h e had driven forth D ionysu s the
Younger
213
.
,
.
,
.
,
,
.
,
.
,
,
.
.
,
,
,
’
,
.
,
.
’
,
.
,
.
,
.
,
.
E PAM I NON D A S
I—X
M ANN E R AN D A CC OMPAN I M E NT
E PAM I NONDA S
8
5
(
87 )
-
IV
I—
1
E pa m inond a s w a s the no b lest o f all the Greeks
H e was b orn a t T h e b es i n po or circu m stan ces b u t w a s
2
educated very carefully b y h is teachers Thus he le a rned
3
singing a n d dancing arts which at Ro m e were considered
vices b u t in Greece p raiseworthy Lysis the Pythagorean
w h o h ad co m e with his p u p ils to Greece t a ught him philo s
m
at
I
n
t
h
e
p
alaestra
he
ai
ed
uickness
of
ove
op h
m
q
(
y
ment ) b ecause he th ought he w a s in this w a y b etter trained
f o r t h e practice o f arms
H e c herished truth and h onor
to such a —degree that he p referred to endure p overty rather
than to receive mon ey un l a wfully [through wrong ] O n ce
Art a xerxes King o f Persia wished so m e (favor ) from t h e
The b a ns To gain [ do ] this he sent D i o med on to Th e b es
wit h a large s u m o f mon ey
This man attempted with
the money to b rib e Ep aminon das
But wh en h e met
Ep a m inondas with M i cy t h u s whom he had b ri b ed h e
4
could not tempt him in any w a y for not o n ly did E p a m i
4
n o n d a s n ot receive th e mon ey b u t h e even compelled M i c
y
thus to return to D i o m ed o n the gold which he had received
from him an d which he had with him
H e a fterward s
sent D i o m ed o n wit h it to Athens for s a fety At Ath en s
he prov i ded a S hip in which D i o m e d on could reach A sia u n
h a r m ed There was n ot gold enough in th e world to tempt
Ep aminondas
C OMPAR IS ON ( as 9 4)
E PAM I NONDA S V—X
214
.
.
-
-
,
,
.
,
.
,
,
,
,
.
.
-
-
.
,
,
,
.
.
.
,
,
,
.
.
.
.
-
Few Greeks were m ore eloquent than E pa min ondas
I ndeed no The b a n w a s ha p p ier th a n h e in rep a rtee [ the
215
.
.
,
1
p
r a ecl d r u s
.
2 t iZ r a
3
.
16
.
4 n on
m odo
s ed et i a
m
.
N E PO S
6
9
reply ] T o b e sure The b ans had m ore strength
than b rains Yet a few o f them had so me [ som eth ing o f]
eloquenc e S ome of the opp on ents o f E p aminondas wh o
s a w that he w a s well trained in war preferred the p al aestra
For in this w a y they h op ed t o divert (th e
t o the camp
thoughts of ) th eir fellow citizen s fro m w ar B ut E p a m i
h ondas showed th at The b es w as gaining slavery rather
than p eace b y suc h m ean s ; th at l asting peace com es from
war T he S partan s p o wer was sh aken n o les s b y his el o
f
or b
his
arm
s
it
h
e
d
eprived
the
S
partan
s
u e n c e than b
q
y
y
Again an d again did h e endure inj uries
o f their allie s
at
th
e
h
an
ds
of
h
is
fellow
citizen
s
and
n
ever
cherished
)
(
res entment again st his c o untry W h en th ey n eeded his
care h e cam e to t h eir aid with out a thought O f the previou s
inj ury [ n o m em ory of t h e In j ury b eing h eld to ] O n ce
even b e retained the c om man d longer th an h e legally
c ould b ecause h e s a w th at the n ew gen er a ls were i n ex p er i
1
p erish
So h e
e n c e d an d th at th e army would otherwise
h eld the co mm an d f or m ore th an fou r m onth s O n his
return he was accused o f n ot o b eying th e law H e c on
fessed b u t aske d Of th em to s a y after his death that he
h ad b een killed b ecaus e h e had c omp elled th em to over
c om e th e Lac edaemonian s H e fell at M a ntinea and died
w hen th e B o eotian s were announcing to him their victory
b revity
of
.
,
.
.
,
,
’
.
-
.
’
.
,
.
-
,
-
.
,
.
,
,
,
.
.
.
,
,
,
,
.
.
R
E L AT I ON S
OF
P L AC E (9 5
.-
99 )
P E LO P I D A S
At The b es P el o p id a s was n ext t o E paminondas in
hon or ;for under his guid a nc e the S p artan s were driven fro m
the C a d m ea and The b es was f reed The citadel Of The b es
216
.
.
,
1 a l i t er .
,
N E PO S
8
9
was declared king Within a sh ort time h e heard that
1
the Persian s were pre paring f r es h t r o op s to send against
Greece
H e thought it b etter f or the Gre eks to send
tro op s t o A sia immediately Th e p ower was given him
a few days later an d h e w en t quickly t o A si a where he
found the royal satrap s unprepared O n e of them Tissa
l
treac
h
erous
y
o
b
tained
a
three
months
truce
r n es
h
e
p
D urin g this time h e was prep arin g for war b u t A g es i l a u s
kept to his agreement throughout th e truce After th e
truce A g es i l a u s ravaged th e country o f T i s s a p h er n es until
winter T hen h e withdrew to E phe sus Th e n ext year
year
which
followed
he
declared
that
he
intended
to
]
[
storm S ardis
T his T i s s a p h er n es did not b elieve an d
in a few days protected th e oth er s ectio ns b y his garri
2
sons A g es i l a u s h o w ever actually m oved toward S ardis
and after gain ing much b o oty was planning to marc h
again s t th e king when h e w a s ord ered b y th e ep ho rs t o
return h om e H e accomplis hed this marc h in thirty days
and defeated the B oeotian s an d A thenian s at C or o n ea
.
.
.
,
,
.
,
’
,
.
,
.
.
.
,
.
,
,
.
,
,
,
,
,
.
.
R E L AT I ON S OF T I M E
A GE S IL AU S
[ H r ft r d t
e ea
—
V—VIII [ Th e d a t es
r
a e ea c h ex e c i s e a c co
e
DAT ES
rd i
ng
10
6
1
0
4
)
(
a re
t o the
—
tt
fic i i o u s ]
R
oma n
t
m e hod ]
After the defeat o f his opp onents at C o r o n ea o n
August 14 th A g es i l a u s led h is army to C orinth H ere
he waged war for many m onth s and drove his enemies
within the city Yet he desir ed that the Persian s sh ould
su ffer p u n l s h m en t r a ther th an th e Greeks an d h e b e
moaned the death of s o m any Gr eek s f O n O cto b er 7 t h
he refused to [ said he would nbt ] b esiege C orinth f or it w a s
218
3
,
.
.
,
.
,
,
1 n orm s
3
.
108
.
EU M EN ES
V
N
9
not fitting t o destroy one of th e n o b lest citie s o f Greece
1
M eanwhile the S p artan resources were s h aken b y th e
A g es i l a u s had n o t b een
b a ttle at Leuctra on J uly 5 t h
present at this b attle b u t h e aided the Lacedae m onian s
wit h h is coun s el when on the first o f N ovem b er E p a m i
S hortly a fter on the l o t h
n o n d a s led his a rmy to S p arta
so m e young S p artans tried to desert to E paminondas b u t
A g e s i l a u s wh o had detected their p lans a dded so m e o f his
own co m p a nio ns to th eir num b er and in this way saved
all After The b es had b ecome th e h ead o f Greece Agesi
laus aided his country with th e money of wh ich it was i n
w a nt
All the gifts b estowed o n h im b y others he g a ve
to his people
When he was returning fro m T a ch u s
t owhose aid [ to whom a s aid ] he had b een s ent he fell
sick and died o n D ecem b er 2 2 d
.
.
,
,
.
,
,
—
,
,
,
,
,
.
-
.
.
,
,
.
,
R E L AT I ON S
OF
TI M E
— BY
EU M E N ES
219
C
L A USE ( 107
-
111)
I—I V
When th e M acedonians were p owerful th ey were
vexed th a t a foreigner S hould b e p laced over t hem Yet
while Phili p was king E u m enes of C a rdia was hi s se cre
tary This p osition was very h onor a b le b ecau s e th e s ec
r et a r
w
a s f a m iliar with all the p l a n s o f the king
After
y
P hili p h a d b een S l a in and Alexander h ad b ecom e king
m
m
a
ruled
E
u
enes
held
the
S
e
p
osition
with
him
When
[
]
Alexander w a s d y ing a t B a b y lon h e assign ed C a p padocia
to E u m enes
H e h ad a lready intrusted to P er di cca s th e
gu a rdi a n s h i p O f his children and h is em p ire [ h is c h ildren
and empire to b e guarded ]
Th is (man ) immediately w o n
E u me ne s ov er t o himself b efore C r a t er o s and Antip ater
.
,
.
.
,
.
,
,
.
,
.
.
,
1
Cf Ep a m
.
.
VI
.
N E PO S
I 00
c ould p ersuade him t o j oin them For h e recognized h i s
fidelity an d s a w how useful [f o r h o w great us e ] h e would
A s soon as th e death o f Alexander was
be t o hi m
kn own all th e others gath ere d force s to crush P er di c c a s
T he l atter hastened to E gypt again st Ptolemy wh ile E u
mene s was left to Oppose the E urop ean ar m ies until h e
c o ul d return t o Asi a
E umenes forces were untrain ed
an d thought that th ey were march ing a gainst b ar b arians
B efore his troop s could learn that their opp onents were
M acedonians E u menes engaged in b attle and killed C r a
t e r o s an d N eo p tolemus
T he rest of the army after asking
p eace o f him o b tained it b u t did not keep their pledge
E um enes remem b ered his friendship f or C r a t er o s and s ent
hi s b ody h om e t o M acedonia
.
.
,
.
,
’
.
,
.
,
.
,
,
,
.
.
U S E AND SE Q UE N C E OF T E N SES
EU M E N ES
—114
1
1
2
(
)
V—VIII
M eanwh ile after P er d i cc a s had b een slain b y S el eu
The
c u s in E gy p t A n tip ater w a s put in charge O f a ffairs
M acedonian s c onde mned E umen e s t o death together with
the other frien ds of P er d i cc a s A ntigonus pursued him
b u t h e extricated himself fro m th e plac e wh ere Antigonus
had surrounded him and fle d t o N ora H ere he w a s b e
sieged all winter b y Antigo nu s whose works he kept b urn
ing an d destroying H is horses were exercised every d a y
in t he castle b y (m ean s of ) a d evice (of ) h i s
A S a result
th ey were sleek when h e led th em forth th e next spring
Wh ile h e w a s pretending to tre a t for a surrender he es
cap ed with all h is m en O lym p ias the moth er O f Alexan
der sought h i s a dvice b efore returning to M acedonia from
E p irus Th e advic e that h e gave s h e did n ot follo w ; b u t
220
,
.
.
,
.
,
.
,
.
.
.
,
.
,
.
,
N E PO S
5
his generals str a ngled E umenes b efore A ntigonu s
w a s prep aring to m arc h could for b id it
,
,
C
,
w ho
.
A USE ( 115 —118 )
PHO C I ON
222
Ph ocion is b etter kn own for his integrity th an f or his
milit a ry la b ors B ecause Of h i s p overty King Philip gave
1
h im m uch m oney for he hop ed in this w a y to w i n h i s sup
p ort at Ath e n s
B ut as P h ocI O n th ought his little fi eld
would supp ort him an d h is sons he refu sed th e money
H e also said t h at h e w a s unwilling to increas e th e l u x u r i
ou s living
f
luxury
o
his
s
on
s
b
acc
epting
much
m
oney
s
o
[
]
y
M any pitied h i m b ecause h e w a s im prisoned (when ) eighty
years o l d fo r wh en he was gen eral toget her with N icanor
C as sander s p refect h e had n o t prevented N icanor ( from )
s eizin g th e Piraeus
W h en t h e p eopl e h a d gain ed the
upper hand th ey b anished Ph ocion and D em etriu s of Pha
lerum Ph ocion fle d to Ph ili p where h e w a s accused b y
th e Athenian s of h avin g [ that h e h ad ] b etrayed th e Piraeus
to N icanor S inc e Philip was u nwilling to o ffend the A t h e
n i a n s h e se n t Ph ocion to Ath en s to b e tried b y th e At henian
laws The Athen ian s were s o in cen sed b ecause o f the s u s
i
t
treachery
t
at
h
e
was
imm
ediately
condemn
ed
i
n
f
h
o
c
o
o
p
death n o r w a s an opp ortunity even given h i m to p lead his
c a u se As the m ultitude hated him slaves b uried him f or
n o free m an dared do it
.
.
,
,
.
,
.
.
,
,
’
,
.
,
,
.
.
,
.
,
,
,
.
.
PU RPO SE
P HRA SE
T I MO L E ON
— BY
u
s
123
(
)
-
Timoleon s eems to hav e existed for th e purp ose o f
freeing hi s fellow citiz en s N ot o nly was he unwilling to
223
.
-
.
1 con c i l i o
'
.
T I MO L E ON HAM I L C AR
I O3
,
hav e any part [ take a sh are ] in the sovereignty th at his
b rother had seized a t C orinth w h ere h e w a s b orn b u t h e
even thought it b etter to have his b rother killed than (for)
I t is a proof o f his love of l i b
C orinth to los e i t s freedo m
er t y th at wh en he had driven D ionysu s fro m S yracuse and
could h a ve b een tyrant he laid down his command and
p a ssed the rest of his life as a private (citizen ) ; for he h ad
co m e to aid the S yracusans after Dionysus on the death
of D ion had reg a ined his power
N ot only did he t a ke
care to free S yr a cus e fro m tyrants b u t he drove the C a r t h
As m any cities were deserted b e
a g i n i a n s from S icily
c ause of th e war he summ oned fresh [ new ] colonists fro m
When b y thes e mean s
C orinth a n d Greec e to restore them
he had gained p e a ce fo r the S yracusans h e laid down th e
p ower as has b een said to preserve li b erty I t w a s to his
adv a ntage also to d o this For the citizen s n ever envied
him afterwards and even wh en h e b ecam e b lind p ermitted
him to b e drawn to the council b y his o w n mul es an d to
sp eak from his wagon
After h i s death the gymnas ium
where h e w a s b uried w a s c a lled T i m ol eo n t eu m
,
,
.
,
,
,
.
,
,
.
,
.
,
.
,
,
,
.
,
,
.
.
P U RPO SE —
BY C
L A USE
( 124 4
28 )
HAM I LC AR
When the first Punic war w a s almost ended H a m il
car (while ) a young m a n w a s sent to S icily to command the
a r my
The C a rthagini a n s were losing all th e island b u t
w h erever he w a s p resent they were victorious
T o c on
m
uer
th
e
Ro
ans
t
h
e
more
uickly
h
e
never
let
S
li
p
lost
q
q
[
]
an opportun ity for [ of ] fighting After the C arth a gini a ns
h ad b eco me exhausted b y the ex p enses o f the struggle they
ordered H a m ilc a r w h o was defendi n g E r y x to end th e war
and return home t o C arthage The Roman leader C a t u l u s
224
.
,
,
,
.
,
.
,
.
,
,
,
.
,
,
N E PO S
I O4
h o wever de manded th at H a milcar sh ould not leave E ryx
1
without surrenderin g h i s arm s This H a m ilcar refused to
do and at last the Ro m ans had t o yield to his stu b b ornn ess
O n h i s return to C arthage h e le a rned that it w a s in gre a t
danger b ec aus e o f th e m ercena rie s it had used in this w a r
C arthage indeed did n ot h esit a te to ask h elp fro m its
en e m y Rome
Finally it sought aid Of H amilcar w h o
w a s pl a ced in c o mm an d of th e army
H e so on drove the
mercenaries away fro m the city and restored all Africa to
th e p ower o f C arthage T hen f o r th e p urpo s e o f renewing
the war with Ro me h e cro s sed into S pain wh e re h e gained
2
great b ooty
When he was o n the p oint o f carrying the
war into I taly h e w a s S lain and hi s s o n i n law H asdru b al
received th e c ommand
I n a sh ort time on H a sdru b al s
d eath H amilcar s s o n H ann i b al b ecam e leader o f the army
,
.
,
.
,
’
.
,
,
.
,
.
.
,
,
,
.
-
-
,
,
’
.
,
’
,
.
R ESU LT ( 129
HANN I BA L
13 3 )
-
I—IV
H anni b al surp asse d all oth er commanders and s o
in his b attle s in I taly h e alw ays cam e O ff victor B ut he
was weaken ed b y j ealousy at C arthage H is h atred o f the
Ro mans was indee d s o great th at h e n ever stop p ed pl a n
nin g war [ warring in h i s min d ] a gain st Ro m e Th rough
his influence not onl y was P hilip King of M acedon m ade
an enemy o f R ome b u t even King Antiochus whos e
kingdo m was n ear th e Red S ea made w a r up on I t a ly
Wh en the Ro man s learned of th e latter s plan s they tried
to m ake H a n ni b al an O b j ect of s uspicion to th e king [ b ring
H anni b al under th e king s susp icion ] This the y did n ot
d o in vain ; f o r the king did n ot dou b t [ it w a s not d ou b tfu l
2
1
Cf M i l t VII
Ab l t
n i i w i th A bl t i
225
,
.
.
.
.
,
,
,
,
,
.
,
’
,
’
.
s
a
ve
s o u e.
.
.
.
10 6
N E PO S
Th ey h ad n ot defended S p ain and young S cip io having
con que red that country m arc hed to C arth a ge
H ann i b al
was hastily called h om e fro m I taly (Though ) con quered
at Z am a yet within a few d a y s h e was holding n ew levie s
B ut in the meantim e his co untry made p eace with the R O
man s S o me time later the Rom an s de m anded H ann i b al o f
th e C arthaginian s H earing of th is H anni b al esc a p ed to
King A n tiochu s who m he s oon in duced to w a r with Rome
“
I f Antioc hus follows [ o b eys ] my s uggestions h e will b e
victorious thought H anni b al B ut th e king w a s afraid to
wage war in H anni b al s way a n d s o w a s routed
,
,
,
.
.
,
.
.
.
.
,
,
.
,
”
,
.
’
.
C
ON D I T I ON S — PO SSI B L E AN D
C
ON T RARY T O FA CT
1
3
8
1
4
1
(
)
-
HANN I BA L I X—X III
227
When H anni b al reached C rete after the defe at o f
Antio c h us h e feared th e avarice of th e C retan s For if th ey
should learn that he had a large sum o f money with h im
they would kill him Acco rdingly h e deceived them b y a
shrewd trick [ plan ] a n d esca p ed with his property [ things ]
H ere h e might have remained
t o King P r u s i a s o f Po ntus
free fro m [ without ] danger h ad he n o t arou sed th e king
again st the Roman s First h e tried to win over other war
like n atio n s t o his plan I f h e could crush E umenes King
o f Pergam os who was a strong frien d o f th e Roman s the
other ( measures ) would b e easy When accordingly he
was a b out to fight a naval b attle [ fi ght with the fleet ] he
S h o wed h i s m en where E u menes w a s and ordered them to
1
attack h is ship i n a b ody
I ndeed they would h a ve over
com e E umenes if he h ad n ot sought safety in flight T h e
rest o f th e fleet h owever co uld have con q uered H anni b al
.
.
,
.
.
,
-
-
-
.
,
.
-
,
,
.
,
-
-
,
.
.
,
,
,
1
fin i w
r s us .
CATO
10 7
if they h ad not b een frighten ed For H anni b al s sailors
threw on b oard j a rs in which they had put p oisonous
serp ents O n seeing these th e ene m y fled to l a nd After
this victory H anni b al hap p ened to b e m entioned at Rome
“
Th e Romans th o ught : I f
b y the a m b a ssadors of P r u s i a s
P r u s i a s keeps H anni b a l with him w e sh a ll never b e free
fro m plots
Accordingly they demanded his surrender
r u s i a s did n ot do this
P
th
a t he S hould b e given the m ]
[
b u t th e Roman s surrounded H ann i b al s house t o seize him
O n le a rning this H anni b al too k p oison
For if he h a d not
done s o h i s most b itter enemies would have killed him
’
.
,
.
.
.
,
.
.
,
’
.
.
,
.
,
C
ON C ESSI ON AND PRO VIS O (
—
14 2 14 5
)
0
C
AT O
Alth ough N ep os wrote ab out many Roman s the
lives of t w o o nly C ato and Atticus have b een left to us
m
Wh
en
a
young
man
th
e
for
er
did
not
give
attention
t
o
(
)
pu b lic offic e b u t w a s b usy far fro m Rome M arcus Per
p enna the ex censor tells us that although he h ad an i n h er
i t a n c e in the territor y of the S a b ines h e l a ter frequented th e
Forum at t h e suggestion of Lucius V a lerius Fl a c cu s E ven
if this is not true we know that h e ca m e to Rome and held
many pu b lic o ffices Although h e w a s m a de consul a n d had
won a triu m p h yet as censor h e has left th e greatest fame
h
e atte m pted to check t h e luxu r o f the Roman
name
For
[
]
y
p eo p le which was b eginning to b e a d a nger to the state To
S h ow h i s rem a rk a b le industry N e p os states th a t he was
a s k i l l f u l f a r m er
a gre a t gener a l a n d a p le a sing orator
E ven when eig h ty ye a rs o ld h e devoted hi m self to literature
I n deed even if h e h a d b een younger h e could hardly have
b een m ore eager in its pursuit
H e als o wrote a history
228
,
.
,
.
,
,
-
,
.
-
,
,
,
,
.
,
,
-
.
,
.
,
.
,
,
,
.
,
.
‘
,
,
.
N E PO S
08
of
th e deeds o f th e Rom an p eople in which everything
w
as
f
o
that
worthy
admiration
was
forth
H
e
told
s
e
t
(
)
h o w th e Rom an s waged war with th e C a rt h aginian s and
other n ation s b u t in h i s work th e leaders Of thes e wars
were n ot n amed D O y ou rem em b er th e famous sayin g o f
?
C ato in regard to C arthage
,
.
,
.
I ND I R E CT D I S CO U R SE — D E C L ARAT IVE SE NT E N C ES
AT TI C US
229
—
1
4
1
5
6
0)
(
I—V
Write in indirect discourse
I D ependin g on N e p Os c ri p s i t : Titus P o m p o n i u s Atti
c u s was of th e equestrian order and h ad inherited this d i fi
g
n it
from
rem
ote
ncesto
rs
without
reak
H
is
father
a
b
a
y
a s n o t only rich f o r the tim es
wh o w
b u t especially de
voted t o literature ed u c a t e d h i s son in all the arts an d
the b oy displayed [ there w a s in th e b o y ] s o great aptitude
f o r his work th at h is high spirited m ate s co uld n ot endure
it calmly b u t were stimulated b y his zeal When h e was
still a young m an his father passed away T O a void o f
fending th e foll owers O f C inna or o f S ulla h e withdrew to
Ath ens o n the death o f S ulpicius As h e c arried his prop
with
him
he
su
ffered
n
o
lo
ss
o f h i s e st a te and was a b le
er t
y
to aid th e Athenians whenever they wished to b orrow
.
.
s
.
-
-
.
,
,
’
,
,
-
,
.
.
,
,
.
.
,
II
D epending on N e p os s c r i b i t : Alth ough Atticu s would
n ever accept interest fro m th e Athenian s h e n ever allowed
the de b t t o b eco me overdue [ to h e owed longer than w a s
agre ed ] When he w a s away from Athen s and could n ot
prevent it th e Ath enian s erected statues to his h on or [ to
him ] E ven S ulla was captivated b y h i s culture and learn
ing and tried to b ring h im b ack to Rome But he would
n o t b ear arm s again st h i s friend s and preferred to rem ain
.
,
.
,
.
,
.
I 10
N E PO S
I ND I R E T D IS O U R SE
C
C
-
Q UEST I ON S AND C OM M AN D S
—
1
1
5
3
55
(
)
ATT I C US X I X V
-
23 1
Write in indirect disco ur se
1
I D ep ending o n N e p Os s c r i p i t : V
Vh O at that time
th ought that Antony wo uld return victoriou s t o I taly ?
Yet he did return and remem b ered th e k indnes s of Atti
c u s wh o with th e oth ers had feared proscription
Fo r he
s ent him (Atticus ) a guard t o b ring h i m with out danger to
D o n ot think Atticus did n ot assi s t the p r o
himself
scri b ed wh en every o n e [ the c o mmon people ] w a s search
ing f o r them E ven after B rutus had b een slain a t Ph ilippi
Atticus protected as m any as he could H ow could o n e
think h i s li b erality tim e serving
H e assisted th e u n f or
t u n a t e an d p referred to fo rget rather than to avenge an
inj ury Wh at c a n b e more n o b le th an this ?
.
.
s
.
,
.
.
-
,
"
.
-
,
.
.
II
’
D ependin g o n N e p Os s c r i b i t : With all Atticus
wealth his h o u se w a s m ore tasty th an expen sive ; h i s
h ou sehold was c o m posed o f well educated S laves [ b oys ]
readers an d scri b es E ach o n e had b een b orn and trained
in th e house [ at h om e ]
N ep o s c ould tell h ow much
Att icus [ he ] entered as expended eac h m onth for h e h ad
seen his expen se b ooks Why did h e h ave an educated
hou sehold ? H e wis h ed t o please th e min d n o less than
th e p alate [ sto m ac h ] at h is feasts H e wo uld n eith er tell
n or endure a lie I n tran sacting [ un dert a king ] b usines s
he b elieved that h e sh ould keep his promise H e n ever
wearied o f m anaging th e b u sin ess of others I ndeed the
affairs of m any Roman knights were l ooked after b y him
.
-
,
.
,
.
,
-
.
.
.
.
.
,
.
1
Cf
.
s ec
.
IX
,
en d .
ATT I CUS X VI XX II
III
-
I NFORMA L I ND I R E C T D IS C O U R SE AN D ATT RAC TI ON
— 15
1
5
6
7)
(
A TT I C US X VI XX II
-
Atticus was a favorite with [ pleasing to ] b oth o l d
and young H e lived o n intimate terms with C icero and
H ortensius H e was esp eci a lly b eloved b y C icero w h o sent
him letters from (the time of ) his consulship t o the very end
of h is life These were pu b lished and h ave b een handed
1
down t o us I t is thought that they fully descri b e th e
c hanges i n t h e state during th a t period Atticus b oasted
that h e had always regarded h is sister as his e q ual an d
that no (cause for ) co m pl a int h a d ever com e b etween them
Why should o n e m ention that h e was fon d o f a n cient his
?
tory [ anti q uity ]
For he had descri b ed in h is b ooks the
laws and wars of Ro me and even edited th e genealogy of
illustrious families H e wrote many oth er b ooks b oth in
Greek and in L a tin After O ctavius b ecam e I mp erator
Atticus o b t a ine d fro m him what fortun e had not granted
to any Roman b efore For it is said th at C aesar pledged
his ste p son to the granddaughter o f Atticus Whenever
C a esar wrote to his friends at Rome i n his a b sence h e
always informed Atticus what he was reading an d doing
w
When
he
a
s
seventy
seven
years
ld
o
rn
he
had
a
o
b
(
[
]
)
disease which the p hysician s at the outset thought o f
little cons e q uence [ despised ] Three or fo u r m onths later
w h en the p ain b ec ame more severe [ increased ] h e deter
m ined to a b st a in from food ; fo r h e had noticed th a t this
did not nourish him an d only increased his su fferings
Within a few d a ys h e died and was b uried in the tom b Of
Quintus C a eci l i u s near th e Appian Way
23 2
.
-
-
.
,
.
.
.
.
.
,
.
,
.
,
.
.
-
-
,
.
-
,
.
,
,
.
,
.
E X E R C IS E S
W rd s
o
t
co nn ec ed
y
tr l t d b y s i n gl w rd g f i l
r
r k t
t
b
mi tt d i n tr s l t i n
t t h L t i r n d ri g Fi g r i h e y ty p r f r
I ntr d t i n D t ch e rci s cc rd i ng t t h
C ti n p 5 3
b y h p h ens a r e t o b e
o ds i n
o u nd b a c
W r
S q r br ck ets i n d i c
t t h e s ect i n s f t h
R ma n m th o d
See
i n i ts
-
ua
’
-
a n ty
e
.
a
o
o
o
e
C
e
a e
o
e
.
o
uc
au
o
a ns a e
e s
n
a
o
,
e
a re
e
n
a
o
e
e
o
xe
e
,
.
an
n
av
e a
a
.
a
e
o
o
.
e e
o
e
.
OM MAN D S AN D E X HORT AT I ON S
—160
1
5
8
(
)
1,
"
C atiline ,
o
e
u es
.
a e ea
.
.
C AT
233
C IC E R O
.
do n ot a b us e o u r p atience
D are y o u
c om e into th e S en ate
Let th e guard o f th e Palatin e
th e asse m b ling o f all good citizen s induce you to lay
asid e yo ur mad p urp ose [ m adness ] Know th at your co n
S pira c
is
exp
osed
D
ep
art
th
erefore
from
the
en
ate
S
y
from the city
Long ago I o ught to have crushed you
b ecaus e o f yo ur b old deed s [ b oldness ]
O n mere s u s
i
i
n
c
o
f
sedition
our
an
c
estors
have
Often
put
dangerous
o
p
c itizen s to de ath GO forth then from Ro m e if you
1
would e scap e suc h a fate [ fortune ] O r else c h a n ge
your purp o se N o lon ger plan t o destroy th e city (while )
w ithin its walls
The S enate will not fail i n its duty to the
state if you remain in th e city and plot its ruin We h ave
lon g b een to o m erciful C onscript Fath ers b u t let u s allow
2
th is enemy to dep art
I f h e does not b u t remaining
strives to destroy th is city an d to S lay each o n e of us let
n ot his pun ish ment then keep him waiting a day
N or
ought you to fear for even if he gives u p his plan s and
rem ains with u s yet my guards sh a ll watc h him as hitherto
and he c a n n o longer plot ag ainst the city within the city
.
.
,
.
.
,
,
,
.
.
.
,
,
,
.
.
-
-
-
.
.
,
,
,
,
.
,
,
,
.
,
,
,
.
1
a
li t er
2
.
C f 13 7
.
.
I E RO
C C
1 14
of him and hi s impious p lots T hey would n o t salute him
wh en h e e ntered th e s enate h ous e — i nay more they left
vacant even th e b enc h o n whic h h e s a t M o st men would
p refer to avoid such an a ffront bu t C atilin e would n ot with
draw from their S ight H is c ountry had already s uffered
mu ch through h im H e had inj ured an d plundered her
allies h e had murdered h er citizen s violated her laws
Would s h e n o w su ffer h erself to b e continually in fear
?
n
o
his account
T h e con sul urged him t o depart fro m
1
1
the city b u t he said h e wo uld n ot g o unless the S en ate
S hould s o [ it] order The c onsul how ever would n ot refer
“
2
th
e
q
uestion
to
the
S
enate
atiline
might
said
e
s
e
C
(
)
“
he fro m th e S ilen c e o f th e senators wh en the con sul
3
ord ered him to go into exile what would b e their pleasure
Yet C atiline long d esirous o f laying waste th e city could
n ot then b e influenced to d o this
.
,
,
.
,
'
.
.
,
,
.
,
.
,
,
.
,
,
,
-
-
.
,
,
,
.
CAT
236
.
I
,
94
0
Why s hould C icero h ave thought th at C atiline would
?
reform
H e had always b een a m an who m neith er fear
I f h e h ad
n o r reason c ould keep from disgra c eful deeds
gone into exile h e would h ave don e s o not b ecau se h e
yielded to the necessities of the state b u t th at h e might
b rin g an impious war o n his fath erland
C icero kn ew
th at h e had already sent to th e camp of M anlius at [t o]
Fa es u l a e th at S ilver eagle whic h the army of M arius
was said to h ave b orne What co uld h e mean [ wish ] b y
this b u t [ unl ess ] w a r ? When h e h ad gathered his force
of a b andoned (creatures ) he s a w in it not a single good
man Th e h ab its o f his whole life had well train ed him
.
-
.
,
,
,
.
.
-
-
,
.
2
i n ou i t
3
.
a cet
t
p
.
C
AT I LI N E I
,
1 1— 1 3
1 15
co m mander of suc h an a r m y C icero knew all this
b u t thought that if h e could drive C atiline [ him ] into exile
j ust a s he had b efore th is defeated him for [ repelled him
from ] the consulshi p his undertakings would b e regarded
M a y he separate hi m self from
as b rigandage n ot war
t h e co ns p irators i n the city o r rather let hi m take them
with h i m
Then it will b e e a s i er for m e t o save the
state
thought C icero
C icero did indeed drive him
fro m the city b u t l a ter had to endure su c h a storm o f
unpopularity that he himself went into exile
t o be
.
,
,
,
"
.
,
-
-
,
,
,
‘
.
,
,
,
,
.
C AT
.
1,
I
1— 1 3
Why did C icero a llow a man who h ad a lready b een
1
discovered (t o b e ) an enemy to leave the city unharmed
I f the custo m or laws of his Roman anc estors ought to b e
2
heeded C atiline S hould h ave b een thrown into prison n o t
let loose against the city M any men at Rome h a d these
same views and C icero thought it n ecessary to a n swer
them H e remem b ered that many men had won h onor in
previous times b y putting to death the ene m ies of th e st a te
C onsequently h e did not fear that he would defile himself
o r that any odium would threaten him b ecause o f th is
But he had noticed that m any even a m ong t h e sen a tors
could n ot underst a nd in what danger th e state w a s and
h a d strengt h ened C a t il i n e s cons p iracy b y their we a k views
I f h e h a d done w h at he th oug h t ought to b e done these
m en would s a y th a t h e w a s a cting tyrannic a lly an d the
cons p ira cy could n ot b e crus h ed forever U nder these ci r
c u m s t a n ces C icero j udged it b etter to let C a til i ne g o forth
H e hop ed also th a t C atiline would take with h im t o M an
23 7
.
,
,
.
,
-
.
,
.
,
,
.
,
,
,
’
.
,
,
.
,
.
,
,
1
i n col u m i s
2
.
p
'
'
a r eo
.
I E RO
1 16
C C
’
lius c mp all the rascals o f th e city I f h e sh o uld do this
an d at last a wall S hould separ a te these from all go od citi
zen s each m an would know without (chance f or ) dou b t
that C atiline was the head of t he co n s p iracy and the c o n
s u l c ould more easily defend the altars o f the go ds and th e
h omes of men from this impious allian ce o f crime
a
-
-
.
,
,
,
,
,
.
CA T
238
.
II
1—4
,
O n th e following day C icero told the Roman
.
,
ci t 1
zen s h ow C atilin e wh o h ad plotted t h e b urning of the city
had b een driven forth For C a tiline had dep arted f o r M as
silia as h e said b u t really f or the c amp of M anlius N o
longer would th e Roman s h ave to fear his plots within the
defen ses (o f th e city ) Already many who a little while
b efore did not b elieve that C atiline was t o b e feared were
b laming C ic ero b ecause h e h ad n ot put him to death
1
H ow gladly would C ic ero h ave punishe d him ac cording t o
his deserts
B ut h e had seen that if he s hould [ d o this ]
he woul d b e un a b le b ecause of th e h atred O f th e people to
’
overpower his associates Fo r although C atilin e had l ed
—
forth m any men yet h e h ad l eft more in th e c ity
men o f
n o b le b irth b u t h eavily in de b t wh o c ould even then b e
s een flitting a b out th e Forum These were the m en C icero
th ought w h o sho uld b e feared rather than th at army of
rascal s an d b an krupts w h o had followed C atiline
Yet
C icero might n ow despise the m i n comparison with the
s plendid force s of Rom e ; f or he h ad sh own cle a rly that a
con spiracy h ad b een m ade again st th e state
H e eve n
p ermitted th o s e l ike C atilin e to leave the city if they
wish ed I n this way h e h op ed to relieve th e state Of pois
on ers and p arricides infamou s wom en an d a b an doned men
,
,
.
,
,
.
-
.
,
'
,
"
.
,
,
,
,
.
,
,
,
,
,
.
,
,
.
-
-
.
,
.
.
,
1
l i oen t er
.
I 18
I E RO
C C
of
th em C icero o ffered h i s advice The m ost respecta b le
clas s was still rich b u t they had b een unwilling to add to
th eir credit b y p aying their de b ts I f this class exp ected
to keep [ use ] their p rop erty s a f e i n the comm on ruin they
were mistaken
S u ch men were little to b e feared and
would rather utter threats than b ear arm s again st the state
A noth er class w a s o f suc h as exp ected to gain p ower in
the distur b an ce of t h e [ in the disturb ed ] re pu b lic
To
these th e warning must b e given th at all go od citizens
would b rin g aid to th eir c ountry A third class remem
b ered th e ti m es o f S u lla and hoped for n ew proscription s ;
f o r already th ey had s quandered their m oney in exp en sive
luxuries All th e oth er classes were (comp o sed ) o f de b tors
and criminal s
I t would indeed b e a go od (thing ) for
Rom e if t h es e m en should go o u t into op en b rigandage
fo r th ey would b ec om e a nursery o f C a t i l i n es unles s th ey
sh oul d g o where th ey might b e recognized as en emies
Th ey were s uc h b oso m friends o f C atiline that h e could n ot
liv e without th em
.
,
.
,
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
,
,
.
-
.
C AT
.
II
,
I 1— 1 3
When o n e contrasts the m en w h o are t o form C ati
line s bo dygu a rd with the Roman troops h ow c a n h e fear
th e war
Alre a dy exh austed b y want of everything C ati
lin e will s ee arr a yed against h im th e flower and strength of
al l I taly
N ay o n th e o n e side are all th e virtues o n the
oth er all th e vices S O even if men S hould b e lacking in
zea l th e very gods would oppos e C a tilin e B esides this
C icero has t a ken precautions to have a su fficient guard in
th e city and to n otify th e town s Of I taly o f C a t i l i ne s raid
E ve rything is ready to crush this ma n o r to check all his
atte mpts
A gai n an d again has C ic ero even urged t he
241
.
’
,
,
.
,
,
.
,
,
.
,
-
-
’
.
,
.
C AT I L I N E
111,
1
-
1 19
3
followers of C atiline who have dared to rem ain in the city
to de p art I f t h ey do n ot do t h is [which ] b u t think the
cons u l will b e re m iss th ey will find out [ p erceive ] t h at
the p rison is still an avenger o f imp ious crimes C ic ero
indeed intended s o to act that the evil o nly s hould su ffer
punishment and th e state b e undisturb ed b y any rioting
Although h e desired t o act in this way an d ho ped to
acco m plis h it b y his (personal ) e fforts yet h e told the
Ro man citize ns that he had undertak en this task relying
o n the aid o f the immortal gods alone
,
,
,
.
,
.
,
,
,
.
,
,
,
.
C AT
.
III
1—3
,
"
What a gloriou s e mp ire and what a b eautiful city
had th e gods saved from fire and swo rd
S urely C icero
ought to have b een ( held ) in hon or b y th e Roman people
since th ey [ who ] h a d b een torn fro m th e j a ws o f fate b y
his e fforts an d p l an s When the conspirators h ad alm ost
s et fire t o [ p laced fires b eneath ] the te m ples o f t h e gods
he h ad extinguished the flam es
Although C icero had
already disclosed t h e w h ole plot [ all things ] in the S en a te
he th ought that he ought t o s et forth b riefly to the people
how it had b een found o u t b y hi m
You know said he
when C atiline was b anished fro m the city h o w little y ou
H o w muc h I had then to fe a r if h e
b elieved my words
had n ot gone to M anliu s
H is associates in wickedness
who h ad remained in t h e city were still p lotting I per
ou m
c e i v ed that
ust
wit
h
your
w
n e es s e e t h e m ischief
o
y
y
fore y o u would p rovide fo r your own s a fety
be
S o the
1
con s p ir a tors were watch ed and w h en they tri ed to b ri b e
th e legates o f th e Allo b roges w h o h ad co m e to the
S enate t h e opportunity was presented t o me fo r arresting
242
.
,
.
,
.
,
.
.
"
,
,
,
,
.
'
.
,
,
,
1 c
ii s tod i o
‘
'
.
I E RO
C C
[ 20
all (of ) th em A s th e Allo b roge s with letters to their
1
p eople were leaving the city th e praetors seized them
1
near th e M u l v i a n b ridge and b rought them to me A l
though m any [ and ] n o b le m en thought that I S hould o pen
th e lette rs I refuse d to d o so and immediately c alled t h e
S en ate together
.
,
,
,
.
,
,
”
.
C AT
243
.
.
111, 4—6
Write in indirect disco urse depend in g on
C i c er O
,
t
First Vo l t u r ci u s was led in and told the S enate that
2
Lentulus had given him letters urging C atiline to j oin
force s with the leaders in th e city as soon a s p o ssi b le
For they intended t o s et fi re to th e b uildings an d to
a s soon a s
s l a u g h t e r [ m a k e a S laughter o f ] th e citizen s
he s hould draw n ear the city
T hen I b rought in the
Gaul s who d eclared that they h ad b een urged to c arry the
letters to their p eople an d t o make war o n I taly B esides
Lentulu s had assured the m that the rule of the city must
c ome to him for he was th e third C ornelius and the sooth
s ayers had said th at t h e downfall of the govern m ent would
occur at the feast o f the S aturn alia After this th e letters
were S hown to th e con sp irators E ac h on e could recog
nize h i s o w n seal and han dwriting ; and although at first
t h ey denied th e c harges of the Gauls [ what the Gauls
c h arged a gain st them ] finally they confessed a l l I f th ey
h a d not co nvicted th emselves b y th eir o w n confes sion s
3
they co uld h ave denied ever y thing What did the S en ate
decide to do ? Wit h o ut any a m endment it voted to than k
me for my s ervic es in freeing t h e state and to put C et h e
4
gus and the others exc e p t Vo l t u r c i u s under a rrest
It
dix i
'
.
’
,
.
,
.
,
,
,
-
-
-
.
.
,
.
,
,
-
.
,
.
1
2
t
C o n d en s e h i s
O mi t
,
b ut
t
s en e n c e
Sh o w
by
3
.
c o ns
tr t i
uc
on
i n t he
f
ol l o w i n g c l a u s e
4
.
14 1,
N
.
d
et er
p
r
.
I E RO
I 22
C C
C AT
245
III
.
10 —1 2
,
Write in in direct discourse dep en ding
on
,
.
C i c er6
'
dix it
W hen Ro m an s has any p e opl e b een saved from such
?
p itia b le ruin without armies without b loodshed
Y ou r e
mem b er h ow Lucius S ulla overco ming S ulpicius b anished
Gaiu s M arius an d m any oth ers fro m the state ; h ow this
place ov er flow ed with th e b lood o f citizens wh en C inna was
driven fro m Rom e b y O ctavius I n all th ose civil strifes
eac h sought the destruction o f t h e other
And yet what
did eac h aim t o acc omplis h ? N ot to b lot o u t th e n am e
b u t m erely to
o f the Ro man p eople , as C atilin e desire s
c hange the (form of ) govern ment C atiline and his fol
lowers would have b urned th e city a n d slaughtered you her
citizens had I n o t p reserved you H i s friends have now
b eco me my b itter enemies and it i s your (duty ) to s ee that
I am n ot inj ured b y th em
For I demand o f y ou n o other
—
reward s ave th is
that th e remem b ranc e o f this day m ay
b e c h erish ed in the mem ory o f all good c itizen s Alth ough
others les s wo rthy of this h onor than I may o b tain statues
yet let all rem em b er him wh o preserved this empire fro m
th e as sault of wicked citizen s What I f I should b e killed
b y these men surely there is nothing higher t o wh ich I
should ascend
N ow dep art t o your ho mes reverence
th at J upiter w h o h as protected you fro m danger j ust as
you h ave often previously done Remem b er that I th e
c on sul will b e watch ful i n th e intere sts Of ou r common
wealth
C AT IV 1—4
,
,
,
,
,
.
.
,
,
.
,
.
,
,
.
.
"
.
,
,
,
.
,
,
.
-
-
-
,
.
.
S enators
Why are y ou s o
246
.
,
,
?
are your eyes turned toward me
?
I
t
is
t
h
e
state
a nxious f o r my safety
)
(
w hy
CAT
I L I N E IV
—
,
12 3
5 7
a
that
is
in
p
eril
for
h
er
s
fety
you
ought
to
take
counsel
;
(
)
I f to save t h e st a te I must endure a l l tortures I will do S O
gladly if only your wives an d ch ildren m a y b e snatched
from this gre a t p eril Lay asi d e t h er ef or e (a l l t h o u ght o f )
my safety E ven if I should b e slain b y t h ese m en I s hould
Y o u must co me to a d e
not wis h yo u to p erish with me
c i s i o n t o day in regard to th es e men w hom you have already
condemned to i m prison m ent When S O great a cons p iracy
has b een formed against a state there S h o uld b e n o delay
ing no post p oning action in the hop e that in this w a y the
evil may b e crushed B ut it is m y (task ) first to state th e
t w o propositions whic h have been b rought to y our notice
The o n e prop o ses that as these defendants h ave long
stirred (and are stirring ) the peo p le to overthrow the gov
er n men t th ey should b e punished b
death
The
other
de
y
clares th at th e gods did not esta b lis h death as a (mean s of )
p unishment and urges th at the p unishment should b e i m
prisonment for life [ eternal ] This i s indeed a s evere p en
alty [ of great severity ] for even hop e is taken away a n d
only life is left I f C aesar had only in sisted o n taking
aw ay this with th e confiscation o f their goods [ when h e
S h ould confiscate th eir goods ] he would have b rought
th em rest fro m [ of] their toil an d mi ery
s
.
,
,
,
.
,
.
,
.
.
,
-
,
,
.
.
,
,
.
,
-
.
,
,
,
,
.
,
,
.
C AT
247
.
IV
,
—
5 7
N o dou b t it is for my interest that y ou should
agree with [ follow the opinion of ] Gaius C aesar ; f o r if h e
S hould approve your vote I should have n o more trou b le
since he is con sidered friendly to t h e people I nd eed if
o u will recall (t h e fact that C aesar b u t a few days ago
)
y
voted for a thanksgiving in m y n ame and imprisonment
f o r th ese men you can s ee t h a t th e advantage o f the stat e
.
,
,
.
,
,
,
‘
,
,
I E RO
C C
1 24
outweighed all con sideration s o f private p eril H e re mem
b ers that b y th e S e m p r o n i a n law a Ro m an citizen can b e
deprived o f life only b y vote of th e p eo p le H e forgets
h owever that th es e m en sinc e they [ who ] h ave impiously
planned the de struction o f this c ity cannot b e regarded
as
b
u t (a s
c
itizen
s
enem
ies
any
punish
ent
C
a
n
m
b
e
( )
)
?
t oo cru el
I f your slave h ad m urdered yo ur children and
attempte d your o w n life w ould y o u think any pun ish ment
?
t o o s evere
T he attempt of th ese c on sp irators w a s n ot like
that of G racc hus Th es e are m en wh o h ave determined
t o m urder us t o b urn th e city
B e n ot cruel t o your
co u ntry b y any diminution o f punish ment I f yo u think
I have n ot su fficient guard to carry ou t yo u r decrees you
are greatly m istaken I t i s to your i n terest to notice h ow
m a ny an d what classes o f m en are present a b out th e
s enate ho use E ven th e p oorest desire this government
t hes e t emp les th is c ommon li b erty t o re m
ain [ stand ]
.
.
,
,
,
,
,
.
,
.
,
.
.
,
.
,
,
.
,
“
,
.
,
C AT
.
IV
,
8
-
11
e al n ot o nly o f tho se m en w h o were b orn at
Ro me n ot only o f the freedmen w h o h ave ga i ned the right
—
n ot th e zeal o f these alone I s a y sh ould
of citizenship
b e n otic ed b u t esp ecially th at o f o ther m en w h o are still in
servitude Although this c ity is n ot their country although
—
they h ave n ot li b erty
th e dearest ( posses sion ) o f m an
yet the aud a city o f th ese citizen s ap palls the m an d in their
desire [ desiring ] th at this govern m ent should c ontinue
they are contrib uting to its preservation all the goodwill
th ey d are I f y o u h a ve h eard th a t so me h ave atte m pted
t o b ri be th e n eedy and ignor a nt b e n ot frig h tened at this
b u t rath er provide f or th e s afety o f the Roman peop le
248
.
T he
z
,
,
,
,
,
,
.
,
,
.
,
,
.
I E RO
1 26
C C
ad miration When M arius an d C a t u l u s were consuls
he c am e to Ro me where h e w a s received b y the L u cu l li
S o pleasin g w a s he to these and other n oted m en that t h e
highest ho nors were heaped up on him
our
.
,
,
.
.
AR C H I A S
25 0
—6
4
H ow
was he enrolled a s a citizen
Wh en M arcu s
Lucullus his friend s et out for S icily Archias went with
him C oming t o H er a c l i a o n his way he b ecame a citizen
whic h h a s lon g b e en o n a perfec t equality
o f that state
with us as to rights S om e time l a ter the S enate d ecreed
th at all wh o we re citizen s o f allied state s might b e given
Ro
man
citizen
ship
if
th
ey
th
en
h
ad
a
residence
in
I
taly
(
)
a n d were enrolle d within a c ertain time
T hes e (conditions )
he fulfilled [ did ] A nd yet wh en y o u cann ot weaken these
ffi
o
c
state
ments
fin
ally
remem
er
that
the
record
b
e
o
u
(
) y
at H er a cli a was b urned an d som e o n e o f you demands t h e
p u b lic record s A foolish request [ thing ] esp ecially as h e
m ade his declaration b efore Q uintus M etellus a m o st u p
right and careful m an O r do y ou think th a t the p eople of
H er a cl i a would n ot have enrolled him as a citizen ? Yet
“
they gave this (hono r ) t o m en o f muc h les s a b ility
I f he
had b een en rolled b y the c en sor it would prove th at he
thought him self a citizen ; b u t h e was not enrolled
B ut
you know Gr a t i u s th at h e n o t only made a will b u t often
received legacie s fro m [ o f] Ro man citizens I n doing this
he acted as a Roman citizen
B ut y o u wonder w hy I
?
sh ould d evote myself to h is interests
O ne reason i s that
he furnishes me with rest o f mind wh en I am wearied with
the n oise o f th e Forum I ndee d I am not ashamed to grant
so me time to reviewing such s tudies for b y s o doing I am
b etter ab l e t o aid you all
.
?
,
,
,
.
,
,
.
,
,
.
.
,
-
,
.
,
,
.
.
,
.
,
,
,
.
.
,
,
.
,
.
AR C H I A S
7
AR C H I A S
-
12 7
12
—
7 9
underst a n d m e to s a y th a t th e illustrious
men of wh o s emeritorio us deeds we have read in literature
were tr a ined b y such teaching
I t m ay b e di fficult to p rove
this yet this reply can b e made : When we see h ow much
trained natural a b ility acco m plishes an d how a b le men
h a ve b een aided in ac q uiring (a love for ) virtue b y th e
study o f liter a ture we wonder h ow muc h other men o f
excellent t a lent b u t untrained would h ave accomplished
if they had h ad the molding power o f education H ow
muc h therefore s h ould we love and cherish the man w h o
not only S hows this result o f his teaching b u t if we seek
pleasure only who indeed furnishes us with S O refined a
diversion ? Ag a in an d agai n h as Arch ias recited m any
excellent verses exte m p or a neously Who would th ink that
?
w e should S purn such a p o et
Poets are given to m an b y
th e gods and for th a t reason were called s a cred b y o u r
D id n ot seven cities claim H omer as their
o w n E nnius
?
I f th e rocks and deserts
o w n even though he was d ead
—
i f even wild b easts sto p
res p ond to th e s o n g of th e p o et
to hear it sh a ll we not b e glad to call [ gladly c all ] Archias
?
W h o is not pleased at hearing the praises
o u r citizen
?
Arc hias h a s c ele b rated Rom e b y his
o f his own merits
praises For th e same re a son (a b ust o f ) E nnius was placed
in the to m b o f the S cipios T h us many other p oets wh o
have devoted themselves to praising the Roman n ame
h a ve b een cherished b y our ancestors S hall we not adorn
Archias also with great honor a n d recognize him as o u r
D o y ou
25 1
.
,
,
,
,
,
,
-
.
,
,
,
,
,
.
,
.
,
,
,
.
,
.
,
,
.
,
ow n
?
AR C H I A S
10 — 1 2
not think th at th e Ro m an p eople receive s less
praise b ecause Archias works are in Greek verse
For
25 2
.
DO
’
.
I E RO
12 8
C C
Greek literature is read a m ong all p eoples — th e Latin only
within o u r o w n territorie s C on sequently our p raises will
p enetr a te to th e farth est b o und s of th e world T h e gre a t
A lexander deemed Ac hilles fort un ate to have h ad H o mer
as a herald o f his valo r An d yet h e h i m self had many
p oets with him to p raise his d eeds I n fact so m e of our
o w n c o mm anders have even b estowed the citizen ship o n
p o ets w h o h a ve written o f their deeds
Would any o f
?
a
th em have refused Arc hi s if he had asked it of them
Remem b er t h at the L u c u ll i father and son and M etellus
Pius were hi s intimate friends Through the m h e could
h ave o b tained anything fo r th ey gave rich reward s even
?
to p oor p o ets B ut why d o I defend A rc hias
N ot alon e
b ec au se o f the se c onsideration s b u t also b ecaus e h e has
pro mis ed to touc h in vers e up o n the events of my co n sul
ship
By this he w ill S pread re me m b r a nce o f me to all
th e earth I n these praise s Of me you al so will b e praised
Therefore S p a re this man this p oet o f genius N ay
rather let him c onduct himself as a citizen unmolested
.
.
.
,
,
.
‘
.
,
,
,
.
,
.
,
.
.
.
,
“
,
.
,
,
,
.
M A N I LI AN LA w
1
-
4
I have to rej oic e th at wh en I am a b out to sp eak
for th e first time in this h o nored pl ace I am to devote my
time to my friend Gnaeu s Po mp ey H itherto I h a ve b een
s o b usy with [ in ] th e d efense [ danger ] O f p riv a te citizen s
th a t I could not aspire to the influenc e of this p osition
But now that you h ave S h own your j udgment of m e b y
25 3
.
,
,
.
,
.
,
electing m e praeto r this avenu e to [ o f ] glory h a s b een
Op ened to me an d I will b ring to this plac e wh a tever
a b ility I m ay h ave B ut to s t a rt at th e b eginning two
powerful kings hav e seiz ed your p rovinces in Asia Your
tri b ute from thes e provinces is a t stake ; th e Roman
,
,
,
.
.
I E RO
C C
1 30
c h ecke d th e en emy s attacks (simply ) b y his [very ] n ame
Think wh at is a t stake C o n sider h o w necessary it is to
protect a provinc e n ot merely fro m war b u t even fro m
fear o f it if y o u exp ec t to enj oy the revenues fro m that
provinc e
A ll your tri b ute ceases while war is b eing
waged E ven if y ou s hould gain a victory th e prop erty
o f your tax gatherers wo uld b e lost
Who then would
farm your taxe s ? I f y o u n eglect the interests of th ese
men oth ers will hav e n o desir e to invest in any of your
provi n ces For they would think that y ou will co nsider
th em o f t o o little imp ortanc e t o defend [ s o little that you
will n ot defend ]
C onsider also what would h ap pen at
Ro m e h ow cr edit would fail an d many b e dragg ed t o ruin
’
.
-
-
.
,
,
.
.
,
-
.
,
.
.
,
.
M AN ILIAN L AW 8 9
-
now th e greatnes s of this measure D O n ot
scorn wh at I S h all s a y For alth ough this war is n ot to b e
fe ared yet y ou m u st undertak e it with th e greatest care
A n d d o n ot think that great prais e is n o t due Lucius
Lucullu s a m an o f th e greatest wisdom and valor Fo r
although wh en h e arrived M i t h r a d a t es with large force s
was b e siegin g C yzicus that city was relieved b y h i s e fforts
I f th is sam e Lu cullus had n ot overwhel med and sunk th at
well—equipp ed fleet it would already b e b lockading [ shut
That leader also captured
t i n g o ff fro m all acce s s ] I taly
th e king s palaces desp oiled him o f his an cestral kingdom
an d drove him as a s up pliant t o other p eoples H ave I
?
given Luc ullu s su fficient p rais e
H as any o n e even o f his
friends or of thos e who opp ose M anilius b e stowed like
?
prais e on h im
D o y o u ask then h ow t h ere can n ow b e
anything m ore t o b e done if Lucullus a cco mp li s héfl all
this ? S in ce th e qu estion i s n ot unreasona b l e y o u shall
25 5
C on sider
.
.
.
,
.
.
,
,
,
.
,
,
.
.
’
,
,
.
1
,
,
,
,
M A N I LIAN LA W
10 —1 2
13 1
'
learn When o u r army w a s d r i v i n g M i t h r a d a t es fro m his
kingdom they were d elayed b y the gathering of the b ooty
Fo r all the silver and gold t h at M i t h r a d a t es had heaped
up in Pontus was left b y h i m when he fled to the Arme
n i an king
Although Lucullus defeated b oth Tigranes
an d M i t h r a d a t es in Armenia o u r soldiers sought rather
a return from that remote place th an a furth er advance
S inc e this time M i t h r a d a t es has b een gathering n ew forc es
gaining n ew allies I p ass over that terrib le disaster to u s
when h e suddenly attacked ou r vict orious army At that
crisis Lucullus w a s o b liged t odeliver th e a rmy t o M anius
Gla b rio
M A N I LIA N L A W 10—1 2
.
.
.
,
.
,
.
.
.
Fellow citizens I have said enough in regard t o th e
n ature and greatness of this war Let u s n o w con sider
who is to b e com mander o f interests [ things ] s o great
Would that it were difficult b ecaus e Of an a b undanc e of
leaders f or y o u to s elect o n e pre eminently [ especially ]
suita b le
B ut o f all your com manders o n e only Gn aeus
Po m
pey p ossesses th e necessary qualities o f a leader
C onsider his knowledge o f the art o f war — from earliest
b oyh o
od he was trained b y the discipline o f th e camp
What wars has he not waged
I f you should read of t h e
various kinds you would learn that h e has b een drilled in
every o n e I ndeed there is nothing in military experience
that has escap ed his knowledge I s n ot his merit also
equal to his knowledge (Of w a r ) ? I n deed h e has such
merits a s n on e of your ot h er leaders has h ad I f witnesses
to this a r e sought y ou must s elect th e m fr om a large
num b er Fo r not only I taly and S icily which were freed
from their enemies b y his aid b u t Africa Gaul and S p ain
all s a w him overthrow t he num erous foes that oppresse d
25 6
-
.
,
‘
.
.
"
,
,
.
"
.
,
.
,
.
,
.
,
.
,
,
,
,
,
I E RO
C C
132
I
them
Fro m him alon e did every coast every foreign
nation s eek aid wh en the pirates held every har b or a n d no
o n e dared sail exc ept in winter
I f y ou recall that wi dely
scattere d war you will even now wonder h ow su ch a w a r
co uld h ave b een fin ished b y o ne commander in o n e year
Yet Gnaeus Po mp ey in th e fury of war passed over all
c oasts all s hores
By midsummer all th e pirates had
surrendered t o his p ower B esides C ilicia h ad b een added
to the Roman dominion N o longer had we to fear that
ro bb ers would plunder o u r c oasts and even o u r harb ors
And all this w a s ac complis hed by the valor of on e man
.
,
,
.
,
.
,
.
.
,
.
,
.
.
LAW
M A N I L I AN
25 7
13
-
15
A finished co mm ander m ust p oss es s n ot m erely
.
valor b u t als o b lamelessness s elf c ontrol and other quali
ti es of like n ature [ like these ]
Y o u must c onsider the
c h aracter of thes e virtu es [ what sort o f virt u es these are
]
i n the c ase O f Gn aeus Pompey for any o n e ca n recognize
h ow (truly ) great they are I n h i s army y o u do n ot hear o f
the b uying an d s elling o f c en t u r i o n s h i p s [ that the c enturion
1
ship is b ought an d sold ] I f h e had taken from th e treasury
money whic h th e S en ate had app ropriated for th e exp ense
o f war and as others h ave done h ad kept it for him self o r
divided it among his (friends ) already yo ur m urmurs would
S how [ make ] that y o u recall i t to mind
I f y o u are angry
with th e generals who from avarice have don e this th in g
h ow muc h m ore must your fo reign allies b e a larmed all o f
who se fields an d towns have b een p illaged b y th ese sam e
co mman ders
Because th ese remem b er what oth er lead
ers h ave done and kn ow h ow s el f restrained [ of h ow great
self restraint ] Pomp ey and his armies are they regard him
-
,
,
.
-
-
-
,
.
.
,
,
,
,
-
-
-
.
,
"
,
-
.
-
,
1
21n d
.
I E RO
C C
1 34
given i n s ome divine m an mer b y the gods When we remem
b er how great go od fortun e Gnaeus Pomp ey has already
had m ay w e not hop e th at in the future [ rem aining tim e ]
?
he will n ot b e displeasing to t h e go ds
A lready even (t h e
force s o f ) nature se em t o have given o b edience to his will
H ad any o n e b efore we s a w what fortune th e gods have
granted this man dared ( even ) S ilently t o declare hims elf s o
endowed with honors he would hav e b een thought ins olent
1
A t ho me in t h e field everywh ere all things have yielded
t o his wishes
N ow a s w e cannot a b andon o u r allies in
this dang er an d as yo u have a co m mander endowed with
?
suc h virtu es will y ou n ot plac e h im in c harge o f this war
W hy must w e c ho o se another as c o mmander e sp ecially
wh e n Gnaeu s Pomp ey is alre ady in A sia with his army ?
A n d yet Q uintus H ortensius wh os e auth ority has always
h ad t h e greatest weight with y o u s ays that this is not
t h e b est (thing ) t o b e don e
H e think s y ou ought n ot t o
app oint th e sam e (m an ) for all wars I f we had followed
his advic e when w e wer e app ointing Pomp ey c om mander
against t h e p irates even n ow w e S hould b e cut o ff fro m
ou r provinc es
H ow we ak was th e stat e of the Roman
p eople although the ir [ whose ] a ncestors had conquered
all m aritim e n ations and adorned this place with the
S p oils o f fleets while we could n ot keep o u r ow n s hores
—
safe from ro b b ers
n ay m ore even feared to s et forth
from the city b y t h e A ppian Way
O ught w e n ot to
h av e b een ashamed to m ount this ro strum ?
-
-
-
.
-
,
.
,
,
,
,
.
,
,
.
,
,
,
,
,
.
.
,
.
-
,
,
,
,
,
.
M AN ILI AN L AW
19
-
21
H ad th e Roman p eople th en b een persuaded b y
you r views Q uintus H ortensius rath er than b y their ow n
25 9
.
,
,
1 u bi u e
q
.
LAW
M A N I L IAN
1 9 —2 1
35
distress we should not now b e freed from all dangers o n
land and s ea And yet you declared with th e b est i n t en
tions what seemed to you to b e for the safety of th e state
Further as Po mp ey d emands that Aulus Ga bi n i u s shall b e
made his lieuten ant why sh ould h e not o b tain fro m you a
?
man suitab le f or defending your allies By decrees of th e
S enate your oth er commanders h ave Often received suc h
lieutenants as they desired to plu n der your provinces I f
the consuls hesitat e to b ring b efore the S enate the cho os
ing of Ga b i n i u s a s lieutenant I mys el f will do s o Q uintus
C a t u l u s however demands that y o u d o n othing contrary
to the precedent of your ancestors Y ou a n s w er ed w el l
when y ou said that in case an y misfortune sh ould prevent
Pompey from doing all y o u h op ed he would accomplish
there w a s none s o worthy o f yo ur t rust as Quintus C atu
lus And yet we must di ffer fro m this no b le m an who
has b een of s o great an influenc e f o r good in the state t h at
we all b elieve i n him an d gladly listen t o his advice I f I
may call t o m i n d t h e C arthaginian and the S panish wars
o u will remem b er th at thes e were c on ducted b y o n e man
y
Recently even the S enate decided that unless Gaiu s M arius
was placed in comm and of all th e forces o f o u r land there
could b e n o hop e of safety f o r the state Th is same man
b oth su b dued J ugurtha and defended us from th e Teutons
T o p as s b y all others even in the case o f Gnaeus Pom p ey
very many remarka b le h onors have b een granted b y decree
I t was indeed an unheard of (event ) t h at a
o f th e S en ate
k night should h ave a triump h at Ro me that a private citi
I f thes e examples
z en should b e given a proconsulshi p
are not su fficient remem b er h ow h e was p ermitted t o b e
c ome con sul b efore h e had hel d any other o ffice And all
these things too were don e with t h e full cons ent of C a t u l u s
,
.
.
,
,
,
.
,
.
,
,
'
.
,
,
,
.
-
.
,
.
.
,
.
.
,
-
.
,
.
,
.
,
,
.
I E RO
6
3
C C
M A N I L IAN
L AW
22
-
24
26 0
S u ch men s hould re sp ect your j udgment in regard
t o Gnaeus Pompey esp ecially sinc e y o u h ave always a p
p rove d th eir op inion s concerning th is S am e m an D id not
m any men c r y ou t wh en y o u chose Pompey general in th e
maritim e war ? B ut did your j udgment then b rin g safety
o r dis aster to th e state ? C a n th ey n ot s ee that they must
?
f
s om etimes yield to th e will o th e Ro man people
N ow
esp ecially you s h ould h ave in A sia a c ommander of great
s elf restraint ; for it is di fficult to think o f nothing save the
state T h e ric h s hrines an d p rosp erous cities are s o m any
in num b er th at our gen er a ls h ave even soug h t a pretext
? S imply that th ey might
f
reason
o r waging war
Why
[
]
plunder th o s e intruste d to th eir c are an d b ecom e rich o n
th e s po ils o f war A ll this h a s b een don e to such an
are b itterly h ated b y [ in great h atred
e xtent that w e
among ] foreign n ation s Th e c omplaints o f your allies
are kn own to C a t u l u s and H ortensius T h ey kn ow that
th e prop erty o f tho se c ities an d the royal treasure are s o
great and the o rnaments o f the shrines in Asia s o rich
th at yo ur other generals would n ot keep th eir han ds from
them D o n o t then fear t h e threats of these men w h o
alth
ough
endowed
with
the
greatest
talent
would
dis
(
)
suade you from sending [ urge yo u n ot to send ] Gn aeu s
Pomp ey t o the M ithradatic war A b ide b y your purp o se
I pro mis e to aid [ b e an aid t o ] y o u with this pretorian
p ower not th at I expect to gain fro m this any defense
again st dangers or any as sistan ce to ( further ) h onors b u t
t h at I m ay place your advantage b efore my o w n There
fore fellow citizen s app oint G naeu s Pomp ey t o th e man
a g e m en t o f this war
.
,
.
-
.
.
.
.
.
,
.
,
.
.
,
,
.
-
,
,
.
C O LL
1 38
E G E E N T RAN C E E X AM I NAT I ON S
B RYN
H e told m e
M AW R C O L L EGE ,
18 9 7
b uy
him a h orse f o r twenty minae b u t
s aid that h e could n ot pay it n ow b ecause his friend h ad
n ot sent him the m on ey that he needed
I am ashamed o f
my faults b u t w hat b us in es s is th at o f yours ? H e w a s
leanin g o n th e ta b le when sudd enly th e ta b l e w a s moved
and h e fell to the ground I b roke t h e win dow with a
sto ne b u t I c ann ot rem em b er wh at I was trying t o hit
A ll th e world i s full o f goo d men b u t th e wicked see m t o
h av e th e most pleasure s
to
,
.
,
,
,
.
,
.
,
.
C O L U M B I A U NI VE R S I T Y,
189 7
I f I sh ould s a y th at I h ad don e th ese th ings alon e with
D o es
ou t t h e help o f th e go ds I s h ould b e b eside myself
it n ot se em t o h ave h appened providentially that Lentulus
was s o foo lis h as t o intrust th e letters t o th e Gau l s who
th ough th ey might have kept silent n evertheless of their
ow n ac cord o ff er e d u s t h e pro ofs o f C a t i l i n e s guilt ?
.
,
,
,
’
C O RN E L L U NI VE R S I T Y,
189 7
I A ll go o d citizen s will o b ey th e laws o f th e Roman
p eople
T hes e b rav e m en b lo cked t h e way o f th e enemy with
2
their ow n b odies
B
efore
I
fro
m
Rom
e
u
return
ed
to
the
city
e
t
u
t
o
s
o
3
y
from A sia
T
ake
c
are
th
at
tho
s
e
w
are
a
b
sent
m
ay
n
ot
have
a
h
o
4
plac e to whic h to return
o
u
I
f
h
e
had
kn
own
that
were
c
ome
t
day
h
e
o
t
o
5
y
would h ave rem ained at A t h e n s
.
.
.
.
.
,
.
.
,
.
.
C
6
.
ou t ,
O LL E G E E NT RAN C E E X AM I NAT I ON S
1 39
H e said that h e should have done this b efore setting
b u t that h e did n ot know h ow important it w a s
.
D A R T M O U T H C O LL EGE,
O n th e next day C aesar le d
18
97
his forces fro m b oth
a t er q n e the c amp s and advancing a short distance from
(
)
th e larger cam p h e drew up his army and o ffered b attle t o
th e enemy As soon a s (noi ) he p erceived th at the en emy
did n o t com e ou t he withdrew Th en Ariovistus sent a
part of his troop s t o attack (opp ug na r e) th e sm aller camp
and a sh arp b attle was fought till evening (v esp er ) Th en
C aesar calling a council sa i d that he should send o u t a
detachment o f cavalry (a /a ) t o reconnoitre (exp l ora r e) and
when they returned he should o rder the soldiers t o p r e
par e (corp or a ca r a r e) for an engagem ent
out
,
,
.
.
,
,
.
,
,
,
,
.
HAR VAR D C O LL EGE,
A lthough only a small p art
1897
of
the summer w a s left
C aesar determined t o cross into B ritain f o r he had ob
served that in nearly all th e wars with th e Gauls aid had
b een furnish ed t o t h e enemy b y the inh a b itants o f that
island S ince however h e could learn n othing from t h e
Gauls a b out the nature o f the island and o f i t s p eople and
w a s afraid that som e misfortun e might happen to h im if
he acted incautiously he sent a lieutenant to find ou t all
h e could ab out that portion o f Britain which was nearest
to Gaul
I n the meantime C aesar gathered togeth er a b out eighty
ships in which t o carry across the troop s if a favora b le
report w a s mad e b y his li eut enant Wh en after fiv e days
,
,
.
,
,
,
,
.
.
C
1 40
O LL E G E E N T RAN C E E X AM I NAT I ON S
this o ffic er had returned and rep orted all th at he h ad
s een C aesar at onc e s et sail with t w o legions o f i n f a n
try and o rdered t h e c avalry t o follow with all p ossi b le
sp eed
T he c avalry h owever waited m ore than five days b efore
s ettin g ou t an d th en pro ceeded s o slowly th at on e b attle
h a d a l r ea d y b een fought with th e enemy b efore th ey cam e
within sight o f C aesar and th e infantry
,
.
,
,
‘
.
C O LL EGE ,
P R I NC ETO N
18 9 7
th is w a s b rought t o A riovistus
h e told his m en t o wait until the enemy had crossed
the river T hen after h e h ad incited his s oldiers t o the
highest p itc h of daring h e b egan th e attack
1
.
A lth ough n ews
.
of
,
,
,
.
or ,
’
Th e h ostages told him th at th e enemie s camp was n ot far
distant an d that only old men an d b oy s were guarding it
an d that if he cho se to make an attack in th e a b senc e of
th e soldiers he could c apture it quite easily
I t is worth my while citizen s to u ndergo this o u t
2
b urst o f unj u st h atred p rovided th e p eril o f this dread
ful war b e removed from y o u
Let p eople s a y that I
h ave cast him o u t if only h e go into exile B ut b elieve
m e he i s n ot going t o g o
,
,
,
,
.
,
,
.
.
,
,
.
T U FT s C
O LL EGE
,
I 897
M arcellus was much stronger in infantry forc es for h e
1
had veteran legion s tried b y m any b attles C assius relied
mor e o n th e loyalty th an o n th e b ravery of his legions
S o wh e n M arce l lus h ad seiz ed a plac e suita b le f o r a fort
,
.
.
C
14 2
O L L EG E
EN T RANC
E
E X A M N AT
I
I ON S
tune th ey yet placed all th eir hop e of safety in valor and
as often as eac h cohort rushed forward in th at quarter
great num b ers o f the ene my fell
W hen h e p erc eived
this A m b i o r i x ordered h i s men t o throw their weap on s at
a distanc e and n ot ap proac h t Oo near an d t o fall b ack
wh en ever th e Ro man s m ade a c harg e
,
,
,
.
,
,
.
C h ange
fro m
i nd i r ect t o d i r ect d i s cou r s e
Germano s neque priores p op ulo Rom an o b ellum i n fer r e
n eque t a m en recu sare s i l a ces s a n t u r quin armis con t en
dant quod Ger m a n or u m c on suetudo haec s i t a m a j or i b u s
tradita q u i cu m qu e b ellu m i n f er a n t resistere ne qu e depre
cari H ae c t a m en d icere : venis s e i n v i t o s ej ect o s dom o
s i suam g r a t i a m Romani v el i n t p oss e i i s utiles es se a m i c os
vel si b i agro s attri b uant vel p a t i an t u r eo s ten ere quo s
armis p os s ed er i nt
,
,
,
,
,
.
,
,
,
.
C hange
from
d i r ect t o i nd i r ect d i s cou r s e
qui quamqu am p r e mu n t u r
aere alien o d o mi n a t i on em t a m en ex s p ect a n t rerum p otiri
r
r
e
t
u
v o l u n t h onores quo s quieta re p u b lica d e s p era n t
p
Q ui b us h o c p r a eci p i
b ata co n s equ i s e p o s se a r b i t r a n t u r
en d u m vid etur unum s cilicet et idem quo d r el i qu i s o mni
b u s u t d es p er en t s e id quod con a n t u r con s eq u i pos se
A lteru m genus
e o r u m,
es t
,
,
,
,
,
,
’
.
,
,
,
,
.
W I LL I A M S
C
O L L EGE
,
18 9 7
’
fiv e hundred an d fortieth year a ft er t h e founding
o f th e city (a con d i t a u r be) Paulus an d V arro were sent
against H anni b al At a to wn called C annae in Apulia a
b attle was fought in whic h b oth con suls were defeated
Th e consul Paulus w a s killed thirty senators were either
I n th e
-
-
-
.
.
,
,
C
O LL E G E E NT RAN C E E XA M I NAT I ON S
3
captured or slain as well as three hundred no b les and
forty thousan d soldiers Yet no Rom an dared to speak o f
peace S l ave s were manumitted (i n a n u m i s s i s u n t ) a thing
whic h had never b een done b ef ore an d in this way th e
army was in creas ed
,
.
.
,
“
,
.
YA L E C
O LL EGE
i
w
T
m
e
a
ll
o
e
d
[
,
0
3
,
18
97
m i n u t es
]
When th e Romans reached B ritain the b arb arian s o ccu
n
the
shore
hurled
j
avelins
at
them
and
attempted
i
t
o
py g
prevent them from disem b arking (ex n d v i bu s eg r ed i ) Th e
Roman s not accustomed to fig h t on ship s were terrified
b y this until (d on ec) C aesar ordered some o f his ship s to b e
stationed n ear the expos ed flank o f the en emy Then the
b ar b arians d istur b ed b y the arrows and j avelins retreated
slightly (p a n /u m p ed ern r efer r e) While the Roman s were
1
still hesitating th e eagle b earer of the tenth legion j ump
ing (s e p r o i cer e) into the s ea cried ou t Leap down (d es i
l i r e) soldiers unless y o u wish to b etray y our e agle to the
enemy
All immediately followed him and after a fierce
conflict put t h e enemy to flight
,
,
‘
.
1
,
,
.
.
-
,
,
,
"
,
,
,
.
1
H e wh o
U NI VE R S I T Y
ca
rri
OF
ed
th e
ea g l e
C HI C A G O,
.
18
97
E l em en t a ry P r os e Comp os i t i on
'
Translate into Latin (marking all lon g vowels )
I
Ariovistus told C aesar th at he (Ariovis tus ) had n ot
crossed th e Rhine of h is ow n accord b u t at the earnest
entreaties o f the Gauls who were b eing hard pressed b y
their neig h b o rs
.
,
,
.
E N T RAN C E E X A M I NAT I ON S
CO L L E G E
144
M oreover h e wanted to kn o w what b usin ess C aesar
had anyhow in h i s p art o f Gaul which h e had co nquered
in war
3 C aesar replied : Y ou do n o t think do y o u that I
c a n p ermit th e friends an d
dependents o f the Roman
?
p eop le to b e inj ured
a
n
n
ot
C
you
therefo re b e p ersuaded to s end your
4
forces h ome and n ot allo w any m ore G erman s t o cros s the
?
R hine
Alth ough A riovistus sp oke s o b oldly yet he w a s
5
afraid that C aes ar would drive him ou t o f Gaul
2
,
.
,
.
.
,
,
.
,
,
,
.
,
.
A d v a n ced P r os e Compos i t i on
D
O
[
not a
c l ea
th
rl y
tt
mp t
e
ea c
o ug ht
to
r
r
th e
en d e
t
h ho ugh
t
,
E
t La t i n w rd f
r w h a t i t h L t i n w ay
ngl i sh
a n d co ns i d e
in
o
s
or
o
e
a
r
pre
ra p
i ng t hi s
w o d , b ut g
o f ex
ss
s
]
Tran slate into Latin ( markin g all long vowels )
Tullius s end s greeting to Tiro
I th ought that I c o ul d b ear your a b s ence a little mor e
easily th an I do b u t I do n ot b ear it easily ; and althoug h
it is o f great imp ortance to m e t o c o me t o the city as soon
as p ossi b l e still I s eem t o h ave done wrong in leaving you
B ut S in ce it s eem ed to b e your wish n ot t o sail until your
h ealth was restored I h a ve approved of yo ur plan I
h ave s ent M ario to y o u with instructio ns that he is to
c ome with yo u to m e as soon as p o ssi b le o r if you remain
f o r a time that h e is to return to m e at once
But be
1
a s s u r ed o
s
b
that
if
it
don
e
with
safety
to
your
i
t
a
n
c
b
e
f
health I p refer nothing more than that y o u should b e with
me
,
.
,
.
,
,
.
,
,
,
.
,